TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column. 2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information. 3 Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience. 4 Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information. 5 When trouble arises What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident. 6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information. 7 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual. 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Index Before driving 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof .......... 64 Power windows................................ 64 Moon roof .......................................... 66 1-1. Key information ........................... 20 Keys ...................................................... 20 1-5. Refueling........................................ 69 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk .................. 22 Opening the fuel tank cap........... 69 Smart access system with push-button start .......................... 22 Wireless remote control .............. 34 Doors.................................................... 37 Trunk...................................................... 41 1-6. Theft deterrent system............... 72 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel).......................... 44 1-7. Safety information....................... 77 Front seats.......................................... 44 Driving position memory ............. 46 Seat position memory ................... 49 Head restraints.................................. 51 Seat belts ............................................ 52 Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) ...... 58 Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)............ 59 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror ................................................ 60 Outside rear view mirrors............ 61 2 Engine immobilizer system......... 72 Alarm.................................................... 74 Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)............................................. 76 Correct driving posture ............... 77 SRS airbags ....................................... 79 Front passenger occupant classification system.................... 90 Child restraint systems ................. 95 Installing child restraints............... 98 2 When driving 2-1. Driving procedures................... 108 Driving the vehicle........................ 108 Engine (ignition) switch ................ 117 Automatic Transmission ............ 122 Manual Transmission................... 126 Turn signal lever............................. 128 Parking brake ................................. 129 2-2. Instrument cluster..................... 130 Gauges and meters ..................... 130 Indicators and warning lights ... 136 Multi-information display........... 139 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers.................... 143 Headlight switch............................ 143 Fog light switch .............................. 146 Windshield wipers and washer............................................. 147 Headlight cleaner switch ............. 151 2-4. Using other driving systems.... 152 Cruise control ................................ 152 Dynamic radar cruise control............................................. 155 Intuitive parking assist ................. 164 Driving assist systems.................. 170 PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 176 2-5. Driving information ................... 179 Cargo and luggage...................... 179 Vehicle load limits......................... 182 Winter driving tips ........................ 183 Trailer towing.................................. 187 Dinghy towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission) .......... 188 Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual transmission)................ 189 3 Interior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning 1 system and defogger............. 192 Automatic air conditioning system .................. 192 Rear window and outside rear 2 view mirror defoggers ........... 200 3-2. Using the audio system............ 201 Audio system type ........................ 201 3 Using the radio.............................. 204 Using the CD player...................... 211 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs.................................... 217 4 Optimal use of the audio system ............................................ 225 Using the AUX adapter............ 228 5 Using the steering wheel audio switches ............................ 229 3-3. Using the interior lights........... 231 Interior lights list............................. 231 6 • Interior lights ............................... 234 • Personal lights ............................ 234 7 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Index 3-4. Using the storage features .... 236 List of storage features............... 236 • Glove box..................................... 236 • Console boxes ........................... 237 • Overhead console................... 238 • Cup holders................................. 239 • Bottle holders/ door pockets................................ 241 4 Maintenance and care 4-1. Maintenance and care............ 274 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior................... 274 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.................... 277 3-5. Other interior features........... 242 Sun visors......................................... 242 Vanity mirror.................................. 243 Clock................................................. 244 Satellite switches .......................... 245 Ashtrays .......................................... 248 Cigarette lighter ........................... 249 Power outlet.................................. 250 Seat heaters..................................... 251 Seat heaters and ventilators .... 253 Armrest ............................................ 255 Rear sunshade............................... 256 Trunk storage extension........... 258 Coat hooks ..................................... 259 Floor mat......................................... 260 Trunk features................................. 261 Garage door opener.................. 264 Compass.......................................... 269 4 4-2. Maintenance............................. 280 Maintenance requirements .... 280 General maintenance................ 282 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ..................................... 285 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance............................ 286 Do-it-yourself service precautions.................................. 286 Hood................................................. 289 Positioning a floor jack.............. 290 Engine compartment.................. 292 Tires .................................................. 306 Tire inflation pressure.................. 316 Wheels............................................. 320 Air conditioning filter.................. 322 Electronic key battery ................ 325 Checking and replacing fuses................................................ 327 Headlight aim.................................. 341 Light bulbs....................................... 342 5 When trouble arises 5-1. Essential information .............. 350 If your vehicle needs to be towed ...................................... 350 If you think something is wrong......................................... 356 Fuel pump shut off system ........ 357 Event data recorder................... 358 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency .............................. 360 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ....................................... 360 If a warning message is displayed....................................... 369 If you have a flat tire.................... 382 If the engine will not start ........... 391 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.............................. 392 If you lose your keys.................... 393 If the electronic key does not operate properly ....................... 394 If the vehicle battery is discharged ................................... 397 If your vehicle overheats .......... 400 If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 402 6 Vehicle specifications 6-1. Specifications............................ 406 1 Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 406 Fuel information............................. 421 Tire information ............................ 424 2 6-2. Customization .......................... 436 Customizable features .............. 436 3 6-3. Initialization ................................ 441 Items to initialize ............................ 441 7 4 For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners........................... 444 5 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).................................... 445 6 Index Abbreviation list .................................. 448 7 Alphabetical index.............................. 450 What to do if... ...................................... 462 5 Pictorial index Exterior Windshield wipers P. 147 Parking lights P. 143 Moon roof P. 66 Outside rear view mirrors P. 61 Hood P. 289 Side marker lights P. 143 Headlights (low and high beam) P. 143 Fog lights P. 146 Turn signal lights P. 128 Headlights (high beam) P. 143 6 Rear window defogger P. 200 Side marker lights P. 143 Tail lights P. 143 Doors P. 37 Tires P. 306 ●Rotation P. 382 ●Replacement ●Inflation pressure P. 415 P. 424 ●Information Trunk P. 41 Turn signal lights P. 128 Fuel filler door P. 69 : If equipped 7 Pictorial index Seat belts P. 52 Head restraints P. 51 Power window switches P. 64 Interior AUX adapter P. 228 Bottle holders/door pockets P. 241 Floor mat P. 260 SRS driver airbag P. 79 SRS knee airbags A P. 79 SRS front passenger airbag P. 79 Armrest P. 255 Console box P. 237 Cup holders P. 239 Ashtrays P. 248 Power outlet P. 250 8 Front seats P. 44 Cup holders P. 239 SRS side airbags P. 79 Console box P. 237 A Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 60 Personal lights P. 234 Moon roof switch P. 66 Interior lights P. 234 Personal lights P. 234 Interior lights P. 234 Coat hooks P. 259 SRS curtain shield airbags P. 79 Vanity mirrors P. 243 Sun visors P. 242 Garage door opener switches P. 264 Compass P. 269 : If equipped 9 Pictorial index Interior B Driving position memory switches P. 46 Seat position memory switches P. 49 Door lock switch P. 37 Outside rear view mirror switches P. 61 Window lock switch P. 64 Power window switches P. 64 10 C Automatic transmission Automatic transmission shift lever P. 122 Seat heater switches P. 251 Seat heater/ventilator switches P. 253 Shift lock override button P. 392 Cigarette lighter P. 249 Ashtrays P. 248 Manual transmission Manual transmission shift lever P. 126 Parking brake lever P. 129 Cigarette lighter P. 249 Ashtrays P. 248 Seat heater switches P. 251 Seat heater/ventilator switches P. 253 : If equipped 11 Pictorial index Headlight switch P. 143 Turn signal lever P. 128 Fog light switch P. 146 Instrument panel Shift paddle switches Gauges and meters Multi-information display Windshield wipers and washer switch Engine (ignition) switch P. 124 P. 130 P. 139 P. 147 P. 117 Trunk opener main switch P. 41 Glove box P. 236 Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever P. 58 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 59 Parking brake pedal (automatic transmission) P. 129 Audio remote control switches P. 229 12 A Without navigation system Air conditioning system P. 192 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers P. 200 Audio system P. 201 Clock P. 244 Security indicator P. 72, 74 Emergency flashers With navigation system Navigation system* Clock P. 244 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers* Security indicator P. 72, 74 Air conditioning system* Audio system* Emergency flashers : If equipped *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 13 Pictorial index Instrument panel B Without navigation system With navigation system Telephone switch* “DISP” switch P. 140 “DISP” switch P. 140 Distance switch Distance switch P. 155 P. 155 Cruise control switch P. 152, 155 Cruise control switch P. 152, 155 Talk switch* C Automatic transmission Manual transmission TRAC/VSC OFF switch P. 172 TRAC/VSC OFF switch P. 172 ECT switch P. 123 14 ETCS switch P. 126 D Rear sunshade switch P. 256 Headlight cleaner switch P. 151 Instrument panel light control dial P. 131 Satellite switches P. 245 Trunk opener P. 41 Fuel filler door opener P. 69 : If equipped *: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 15 For your information Main Owners Manual Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment. Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Installation of a mobile two-way radio system As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. 16 Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries. CAUTION ■ General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others. ■ General precaution regarding children’s safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children. 17 Symbols used throughout this manual Cautions & Notices CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. Symbols used in illustrations Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.” Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). 18 Before driving 1-1. Key information ............... 20 Keys.............................................. 20 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk........................ 22 Smart access system with push-button start.................... 22 Wireless remote control......... 34 Doors ............................................ 37 Trunk .............................................. 41 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel).............. 44 Front seats................................... 44 Driving position memory........ 46 Seat position memory.............. 49 Head restraints ........................... 51 Seat belts ..................................... 52 Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) ..................... 58 Steering wheel (poweradjustable type) ...................... 59 Anti-glare inside rear view mirror......................................... 60 1 Outside rear view mirrors........ 61 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ....................... 64 Power windows.......................... 64 Moon roof ................................... 66 1-5. Refueling .......................... 69 Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 69 1-6. Theft deterrent system .... 72 Engine immobilizer system........................................ 72 Alarm............................................. 74 Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)....................................... 76 1-7. Safety information............ 77 Correct driving posture ......... 77 SRS airbags ................................ 79 Front passenger occupant classification system.............. 90 Child restraint systems ........... 95 Installing child restraints......... 98 19 1-1. Key information Keys The following keys are provided with the vehicle. Electronic keys • Operating the smart access system with push-button start (P. 22) • Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 34) Mechanical keys Key number plate Using the mechanical key Take out the mechanical key. The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. 20 1-1. Key information ■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 41, 236) Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (P. 393) NOTICE ■ To prevent key damage ● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet. ● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface. ● Do not disassemble the electronic key. 21 Before driving ■ Key number plate 1 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Smart access system with push-button start The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.) Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 23) Unlocks the trunk (P. 23) Starts the engine (P. 117) 22 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Locking and unlocking the doors (front door handles only) Press the lock button to lock the door. 1 Before driving Grip the handle to unlock the door. Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked. Unlocking the trunk Press the button to unlock the trunk. 23 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Antenna location and effective range ■ Antenna location Antennas outside cabin Antennas inside cabin Antenna inside trunk Antenna outside trunk 24 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors When unlocking the trunk The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of the trunk release button. When starting the engine or changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle. 25 1 Before driving The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of either of the outside front door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) ■ Conditions affecting operation The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start from operating properly: (Ways of coping: P. 394) ● When the electronic key battery is depleted ● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise ● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire- less communication devices ● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal- lic objects • Cards to which aluminum foil is attached • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside • Metallic wallets or bags • Coins • Hand warmers made of metal • Media such as CDs and DVDs ● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity ● When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby ● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves • Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves • Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA) • Digital audio player • Portable game system ● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window 26 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Switching the door unlock function It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks. STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.) Multi-information display 1 for approximately 5 seconds while pushing Unlocking doors Beep Hold the driver's door handle to unlock only the driver's Exterior: Beeps three door. times Hold the front passenger’s Interior: Pings once door handle to unlock all doors Hold either front door handle Exterior: Beeps twice to unlock all doors Interior: Pings once STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the electronic key and open one of the doors. If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 74) 27 Before driving , , or on the key. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Battery-saving function In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging. ● When the entry function has not been used for a month or more ● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more The system will resume operation when... ● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch. ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function. (P. 34) ● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 394) ■ Electronic key battery depletion ● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 325) ● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field. • • • • • • TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Glass top ranges Table lamps ■ To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.) 28 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Note for the entry function ● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases. ● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window. ● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.) ● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. ● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.) ● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again. ■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle. ■ Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again. 29 1 Before driving • The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked. • The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked. • The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes are changed. ● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 369) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded. Alarm Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds Situation Correction procedure Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again. Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside and all doors are locked Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid. Tried to exit the vehicle with Exterior alarm the electronic key and lock sounds once for 60 the doors without first turning seconds the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and lock the doors again. Exterior alarm Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors sounds once for 10 the entry function while a and lock the doors seconds door is open again. Interior alarm sounds continuously* 30 Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P Shift the shift lever to P. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Alarm Situation Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. 1 Turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF while the Close the driver's door. driver's door is open *: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only ■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly ● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key. (P. 394) ● Starting the engine: P. 117 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 325 ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer It is possible to deactivate systems such as the smart access system with push-button start. (Customizable features P. 436) ■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 31 Before driving Switched to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door when the “ENGINE Interior alarm pings START STOP” switch is in continuously ACCESSORY mode.) Correction procedure 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 32 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices ● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away ● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function. 33 1 Before driving from the smart access system antennas. (P. 24) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Wireless remote control The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle. Locks all doors Unlocks all doors Opens the windows and moon roof (push and hold) Unlocks the trunk (push and hold) Sounds alarm (push and hold) (P. 74) ■ 2-step unlocking function When you push , the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors. ■ Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice) Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked. Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating. ■ Door lock buzzer If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more. ■ Alarm Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system. ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 28 ■ Security feature P. 29 34 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 325 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 26 1 ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer ■ Certification for wireless remote control For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1 NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 35 Before driving Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 36 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Doors The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch. ■ Entry function P. 23 1 Before driving ■ Wireless remote control P. 34 ■ Door lock switch Locks all doors Unlocks all doors ■ Inside lock button Locks the door Unlocks the door The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position. 37 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Locking the front doors from the outside without a key The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked. Rear door child-protector lock The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set. These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors. Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or cancelled: Function Operation Shift position linked door locking function* Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors. Shift position linked door unlocking function* Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors. Speed linked door locking function All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher. Driver's door linked door unlocking function All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. *: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only 38 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Setting and canceling the functions To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below: STEP 1 The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows. Function Shift position linked door locking function Shift position linked door unlocking function Shift lever position Switch position P Speed linked door locking function Driver's door linked door unlocking function N When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked. 39 1 Before driving STEP 2 Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10 seconds.) Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver's door lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then release. 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Impact detection door lock release system In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate. ■ Using the mechanical key The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 394) ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) CAUTION ■ To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Always use a seat belt. ● Always lock all doors. ● Ensure that all doors are properly closed. ● Do not pull the inside handle of the front door while driving. ● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat. 40 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk Trunk The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control. ■ Trunk opener 1 Release the trunk lid. Before driving ■ Entry function P. 23 ■ Wireless remote control P. 34 Locking the trunk opener feature Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener. On Off The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function. 41 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ■ Trunk light When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened. On Off ■ Trunk handle Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk. ■ Internal trunk release lever The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of trunk lid. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed. ■ Using the mechanical key The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 394) 42 1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the trunk lid closed. This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate, resulting in death or serious injury. 43 Before driving ■ When children are in the vehicle 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Front seats Manual seat Seat position lever Seatback angle lever Vertical height adjustment lever Seat cushion (front) angle knob 44 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Power seat 1 Before driving Seat position switch Seatback angle switch Seat cushion (front) angle switch Vertical height adjustment switch Lumbar support switch CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment ● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. ● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. 45 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Driving position memory (if equipped) Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked. Three different driving positions can be entered into memory. ■ Entering a position to memory Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P. Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Switch to IGNITION ON mode. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. 46 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Recalling the memorized position Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P. Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Switch to IGNITION ON mode. Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the memorized position. Before driving STEP 1 1 Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following. STEP 1 STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. While the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”) press on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps. The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened. 47 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) STEP 3 Open one of the doors If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 74) ■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door. STEP 2 While pushing the “SET” button, push on the wireless remote con- trol until the signal beeps. ■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up to 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. ■ To cancel seat position recall Perform any of the following operations. ● Push the “SET” button. ● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall). ■ If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. 48 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat position memory (if equipped) Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. Three different seat positions can be entered into memory. 1 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Before driving ■ Entering a position to memory Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P. Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set. Switch to IGNITION ON mode. Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps. If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten. ■ Recalling the memorized position Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in P. Vehicles with a manual transmission: Check that the parking brake is set. Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the memorized position. 49 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Operating the seat position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF Memorized position can be activated up to 30 seconds after the front passenger door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. ■ To cancel seat position recall Perform any of the following operations. ● Push the “SET” button. ● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”. ● Adjust the seat position using the switches. ■ If the battery is disconnected The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected. CAUTION ■ Seat adjustment caution Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger. 50 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Head restraints Vertical adjustment Push and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint. Removal Before driving Lock release button 1 Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button. ■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. ■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. CAUTION ■ Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. ● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. ● Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 51 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Seat belts Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. ■ Correct use of the seat belts ● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips. ● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat. ● Do not twist the seat belt. ■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt Fastening the belt Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard. Releasing the belt Press the release button. Release button 52 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats) Down Up 1 Before driving Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click. Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats) If the shoulder belt sits close to a person’s neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward. Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats) The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision. The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact. 53 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system) When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage. The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (P. 176) ■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully. ■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 98) ■ Pregnant women Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 52) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision. 54 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ People suffering illness Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ■ Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. ● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become ● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 52 regarding seat belt usage. ■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions. ■ Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. 55 Before driving large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 95) 1 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury. ■ Wearing a seat belt ● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. ● Always wear a seat belt properly. ● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children. ● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. ● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. ● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. ● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips. ■ Seat belt pretensioners ● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision. ● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur- ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer. 56 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION ■ Seat belt damage and wear ● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door. 1 ● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. ● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. ● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage. ● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Using a seat belt extender ● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision. ● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended. NOTICE ■ When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself. 57 Before driving Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury. 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel (manually adjustable type) The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down. Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically. Pull the lever up. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ■ After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident. 58 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Steering wheel (power-adjustable type) The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 1 Before driving Up Down Away from the driver Toward the driver Auto tilt away When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit. Switching to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode will return the steering wheel to the original position. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 59 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Anti-glare inside rear view mirror In “AUTO” mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduce the reflected light. Turns “AUTO” mode on/off The indicator comes on when “AUTO” mode is turned on. The anti-glare mirror default mode is “AUTO”. The anti-glare mirror is automatically set to “AUTO” whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on. ■ To prevent sensor error To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. 60 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) Outside rear view mirrors Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Select a mirror to adjust (“L”: left or “R”: right) Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch 1 Before driving ■ When the mirrors are fogged up Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 200) ■ Folding back the mirrors Push back in the direction of the vehicle's rear. ■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory) A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch of a button. (P. 46) 61 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) ■ Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory) The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and “R”). ■ Auto anti-glare function (vehicles with sports or luxury package) When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to “AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 60) ■ Rain clearing mirrors When water droplets collects on the mirror surface, for example when it rains, the rain clearing (hydrophilic) effect of the mirrors causes the droplets to be spread out into a film making the rear view clearer.In the following cases, the rain clearing effect will be reduced temporarily, but will return after 1 or 2 days' exposure to direct sunlight. ● After wiping dirt off the mirrors ● When the mirrors fog up ● After waxing your vehicle in an automatic car wash ● After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in underground parking lots, etc. where there is no direct sunlight. 62 1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel) CAUTION ■ When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. ● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back. ● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving. ■ When the mirror defoggers are operating Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot. NOTICE ■ If the mirrors become iced up In order to retain the rain-clearing properties of the mirror, do not attempt to scrape the ice off. Instead, remove it by turning on the mirror defoggers or by applying warm water. 63 Before driving ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. 1 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Power windows The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches. Closing One-touch closing* Opening One-touch opening* *: Pushing the switch in the oppo- site direction will stop window travel partway. Lock switch Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches. Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window. ■ The power windows can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Door lock linked window operation ● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 394) ● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 34) 64 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. 1 ■ Jam protection function ■ When the battery is disconnected The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. (Perform for each window with the switch for each seat.) STEP 1 Open the window halfway. STEP 2 Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the switch for one second. The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on when initial settings are complete. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) CAUTION ■ Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death. ■ Jam protection function ● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes. 65 Before driving If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof Moon roof (if equipped) Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down. ■ Manually opening and closing Fully open Fully close The moon roof can be opened in 7 steps by changing the position of the switch. ■ One-touch open and close Open to step 6 While the moon roof is opening, pushing the switch will stop the moon roof operation partway. Any further opening must be performed manually, using the switch. After the operation stops, press the switch again to fully close the moon roof. ■ Tilt up and down Tilt up Tilt down Fully up/fully down. 66 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof ■ The moon roof can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Door lock linked moon roof operation ● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 394) ■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened. ■ Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly. ■ If the moon roof can not be closed Pressing the switch of at for more than 10 seconds closes the moon roof. ■ To reduce moon roof wind noise ● Drive with the moon roof switch in when you open and close the moon roof manually. ● Drive with the moon roof where it has stopped when opening automatically. ■ Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) 67 Before driving ● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 34) 1 1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof CAUTION ■ Opening the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. ● Do not sit on top of the moon roof. ■ Closing the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury. ● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. ● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. ■ Jam protection function ● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally. ● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes. 68 1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap. ■ Before refueling the vehicle Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed. 1 STEP 1 Open the fuel filler door. STEP 2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open. STEP 3 Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door. Before driving ■ Opening the fuel tank cap 69 1-5. Refueling Closing the fuel tank cap When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard. After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction. ■ Fuel types Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] or higher) ■ Fuel tank capacity (reference) 17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 Imp.gal.) ■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable The lever can be used to open the fuel filler door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened using the inside switch because the battery is discharged or for any other reason. 70 1-5. Refueling CAUTION ■ Refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury. 1 ● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity. ● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury. ● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank. ● Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled. ● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire. ● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard. ■ When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface. 71 Before driving Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer system The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer. Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The indicator light flashes after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned OFF to indicate that the system is operating. ■ System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system. ■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction ● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object ● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle ■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 72 1-6. Theft deterrent system CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 1 ■ To prevent damage to the key Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed. 73 Before driving NOTICE 1-6. Theft deterrent system Alarm The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is detected. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered in the following situations. ● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key with the alarm being set. ● The hood is opened with the alarm being set. ■ Setting the alarm system Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all doors using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds. The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set. ■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm. ● Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or mechanical key. ● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.) 74 1-6. Theft deterrent system ■ Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following. 1 ● Nobody is in the vehicle. ● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set. ■ Panic mode When is pushed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control. ■ Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. Stopping the alarm deactivates the system. ● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood. ● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. ■ When the battery is disconnected Be sure to deactivate the alarm system. If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected. 75 Before driving ● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle. 1-6. Theft deterrent system Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law. 76 1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture Drive in a good posture as follows: Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 44) Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 44) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (P. 58, 59) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 51) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 52) 1 Before driving CAUTION ■ While driving ● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. 77 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ While driving ● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. ● Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged. ■ Adjusting the seat position: ● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. ● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. 78 1-7. Safety information SRS airbags The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury. 1 Before driving SRS front airbags SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components. Knee airbags Can help provide driver and front passenger protection. SRS side and curtain shield airbags SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants. SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants. 79 1-7. Safety information Airbag system components Knee airbags Front passenger airbag Curtain shield airbags “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Side airbags Side and curtain shield airbag sensors Curtain shield airbag sensors SRS warning light Driver airbag Driver's seat belt buckle switch Driver's seat position sensor Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch Airbag sensor assembly Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors) Front airbag sensors Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc. The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor. 80 1-7. Safety information In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants. 1 This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 361) ■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) ● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag. ● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. ● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot. ● The front windshield may crack. ■ Operating conditions (front airbags) ● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform. However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). ● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi- cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together. ● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 90) 81 Before driving ■ SRS warning light 1-7. Safety information ■ Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags) ● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side. ● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen- ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 90) ■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli- sion The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. ● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface ● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole ● Landing hard or vehicle falling ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags) The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. ● Collision from the side ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover 82 1-7. Safety information ■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment. 1 ● Collision from the side to the vehicle body Before driving other than the passenger compartment ● Collision from the side at an angle The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision. ● Collision from the front ● Collision from the rear ● Vehicle rollover 83 1-7. Safety information ■ When to contact your Lexus dealer In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer. ● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated. ● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate. ● A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate. ● The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger airbag cover or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The surface of the seats with the side air- bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. ● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. 84 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. 1 ● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. ● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. • If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. 85 Before driving The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● If the seat belt extender has been con- nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. ● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. ● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri- ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (P. 95) 86 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard. SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger. ● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees. ● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars. ● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas- senger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle. 87 Before driving ● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ SRS airbag precautions ● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy. ● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip. ● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy. ● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be sure to remove it. ● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. ● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components shown on P. 80. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction. ● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. ● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. ● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. 88 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components ● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags ● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails ● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment ● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.) ● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system ● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players ● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability 89 1 Before driving Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. 1-7. Safety information Front passenger occupant classification system Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger. SRS warning light “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light “AIR BAG ON” indicator light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light 90 1-7. Safety information Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system ■ Adult*1 “AIR BAG ON” Off Flashing*2 1 Before driving “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated ■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Indicator/ SRS warning light warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Devices Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner “AIR BAG OFF” *5 Off Flashing*2 Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated 91 1-7. Safety information ■ Unoccupied Indicator/ warning light Devices “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator Not illuminated lights SRS warning light Off Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Deactivated Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Activated Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner ■ There is a malfunction in the system Indicator/ warning light Devices “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights SRS warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side Front passenger knee airbag Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner “AIR BAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated Deactivated Activated *1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture. *2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture. 92 1-7. Safety information *4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 95) *5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 98) ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. ● Wear the seat belt properly. ● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. ● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision. ● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. ● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. ● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. ● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. 93 Before driving CAUTION 1 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions ● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu- minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. ● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 98) ● Do not modify or remove the front seats. ● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat- backs. ● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. ● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat. 94 1-7. Safety information Child restraint systems A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems. 1 Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. ● Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child. ● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 98) Types of child restraints Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child. Infant seat 95 Before driving Points to remember 1-7. Safety information Convertible seat Booster seat ■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 52) CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. 96 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Child restraint precautions ● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. ● A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. ● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision. ● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. ● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. ■ When the child restraint system is not in use ● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment. ● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 97 Before driving ● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In 1 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint lower anchorage. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint. Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (P. 52) Child restraint lower anchorages Lower anchorages are provided for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.) Anchor bracket (for top strap) Anchor brackets are provided for all rear seats. 98 1-7. Safety information Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) ■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat Place the child seat on the rear STEP 1 seat facing the rear of the vehicle. 1 Before driving STEP 2 STEP 3 Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. 99 1-7. Safety information STEP 4 While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. ■ Forward facing Convertible seat STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode. Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only. 100 1-7. Safety information STEP 4 While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place. ■ Booster seat STEP 1 STEP 2 Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle. Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted. Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 52) 101 1 Before driving After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. 1-7. Safety information Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt. Installation with child restraint lower anchorages Type A STEP 1 STEP 2 Flip the cover. Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the anchorages. If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only 102 1-7. Safety information Type B STEP 1 STEP 2 Flip the cover. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages. For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. Canada only Child restraint systems with a top strap STEP 1 Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or a lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the lowest position. 103 Before driving If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorages. 1 1-7. Safety information STEP 2 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap. Make sure the top strap is securely latched. ■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819. CAUTION ■ When installing a booster seat Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: (P. 54) ● ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child. ● Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or seri- ous injured. 104 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ When installing a child restraint system ● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat. ● Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward facing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate). ● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi- tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted. ● Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure. ● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac- turer. 105 1 Before driving Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident. 1-7. Safety information CAUTION ■ Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision. ■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchor When using the lower anchor, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 106 When driving 2-1. Driving procedures ....... 108 2 Driving the vehicle................. 108 2-4. Using other driving systems.......................... 152 Engine (ignition) switch.......... 117 Cruise control.......................... 152 Automatic Transmission........ 122 Manual Transmission.............. 126 Dynamic radar cruise control ..................................... 155 Turn signal lever....................... 128 Intuitive parking assist........... 164 Parking brake........................... 129 Driving assist systems............ 170 2-2. Instrument cluster ......... 130 Gauges and meters................ 130 Indicators and warning lights ......................................... 136 Multi-information display...................................... 139 PCS (Pre-Collision System) ........ 176 2-5. Driving information........ 179 Cargo and luggage ................. 179 Vehicle load limits................... 182 Winter driving tips.................. 183 Trailer towing ........................... 187 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers......... 143 Headlight switch...................... 143 Fog light switch ........................ 146 Windshield wipers and washer ..................................... 147 Dinghy towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission) ......................... 188 Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual transmission) ......................... 189 Headlight cleaner switch....... 151 107 2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving. ■ Starting the engine (P. 117) ■ Driving Automatic transmission STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 122) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 129) Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. Manual transmission STEP 1 With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever into 1. (P. 126) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 129) STEP 3 Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. ■ Stopping Automatic transmission STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, push the brake pedal. STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. STEP 3 When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (P. 122) Manual transmission STEP 1 With the clutch pedal fully depressed, push the brake pedal. STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake. When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever into N. (P. 126) 108 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Parking the vehicle Automatic transmission STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, push the brake pedal. STEP 2 Set the parking brake. (P. 129) STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 122) STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine. STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person. Manual transmission STEP 1 With the clutch pedal fully depressed, push the brake pedal. STEP 2 Set the parking brake. (P. 129) STEP 3 Shift the shift lever into N. (P. 126) STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the engine. STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person. 2 When driving Starting on a steep uphill Automatic transmission Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. STEP 3 Release the parking brake. Manual transmission STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever into 1. Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal. Release the parking brake. 109 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Driving in the rain ● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. ● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery. ● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly. ■ Breaking in your new Lexus To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe: ● For the first 186 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops. ● For the first 621 miles (1000 km): • • • • Do not drive at extremely high speeds. Avoid sudden acceleration. Do not drive continuously in the low gears. Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods. ■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down. ■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 409) ■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is because fuel evaporation leakage check is performed. It does not indicate a malfunction. 110 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When starting the vehicle With automatic transmission vehicles, always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. ■ When driving the vehicle ● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. 2 When driving • Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. • When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly. • Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly. • Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident. ● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. ● With automatic transmission vehicles, do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle. ● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N (automatic trans- mission vehicles) or R (manual transmission vehicles) while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a loss of vehicle control. ● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an accident. 111 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ● Do not turn the engine off while driving. The power steering and brake booster system will not operate properly if the engine is not running. ● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 123) ● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident. ● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury. ● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury. ● Do not drive the vehicle off-road. This is not a AWD vehicle designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road. ● Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water. This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. ■ When driving on slippery road surfaces ● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. ● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. ● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident. 112 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ■ When shifting the shift lever With automatic transmission vehicles, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. ■ When the vehicle is stopped 2 ● Do not race the engine. ● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. ● With automatic transmission vehicles, always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving. ■ When the vehicle is parked ● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi- cle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following. • Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. • The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack. • Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components. ● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. ● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns. 113 When driving If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission only) or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident. 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ■ Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard. ● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. ■ When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard. ■ When braking the vehicle ● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle. ● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase. ● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes. 114 2-1. Driving procedures CAUTION ● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. ■ If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (AWD models) NOTICE ■ When driving the vehicle ● With manual transmission vehicles, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. Doing so may cause clutch trouble. ● With manual transmission vehicles, do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and moving forward. Doing so may damage the clutch. ● With automatic transmission vehicles, do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill. ● With manual transmission vehicles, do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade. ■ When parking the vehicle With automatic transmission vehicles, always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. ■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts ● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor. ● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag- ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. 115 2 When driving Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident. 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible. The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. Front brake only: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded. ■ If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. ● It may be difficult to control your vehicle. ● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds. ● The vehicle will behave abnormally. Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 384) ■ When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle. ● Engine stalling ● Short in electrical components ● Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following. ● Brake function ● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, differential, etc. ● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc. 116 2-1. Driving procedures Engine (ignition) switch Modes can be switched by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch when carrying the electronic key on your person. (The engine can be started in any mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal.) ■ Starting the engine Automatic transmission STEP 1 STEP 2 2 When driving STEP 3 Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. 117 2-1. Driving procedures Manual transmission STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in N. STEP 3 Firmly depress the clutch pedal. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. STEP 4 118 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode OFF* Emergency flashers can be used. ACCESSORY mode Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used. 2 When driving The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber. IGNITION ON mode All electrical components can be used. The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns amber. *: The engine cannot be switched to OFF unless the shift lever is in P. 119 2-1. Driving procedures ■ If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 72) ■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. ■ Auto power OFF function If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF. ■ Electronic key battery depletion P. 28 ■ When the electronic key battery is fully discharged P. 325 ■ Conditions affecting operation P. 26 ■ Note for the entry function P. 29 CAUTION ■ When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. ■ Stopping the engine in an emergency If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds. However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to an unexpected accident. 120 2-1. Driving procedures NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods without the engine running. ■ When starting the engine ● Do not race a cold engine. ● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. 2 When driving 121 2-1. Driving procedures Automatic Transmission (if equipped) Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions. ■ Shifting the shift lever While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever. 122 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Shift position uses Shift position Function P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine R Reversing N Neutral D Normal driving*1 S S mode driving*2 (P. 124) 2 When driving *1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving. 2 * : Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting. ■ Selecting a driving mode The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and operating conditions. Power mode For powerful acceleration and driving in mountainous regions. Normal mode Snow mode For accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow. Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode. 123 2-1. Driving procedures Changing shift ranges in S mode Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever or shift paddle switch. Upshifting Downshifting The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 or 2 if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. (P. 125) ■ Shift ranges and their functions Shift range Function 6 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 5 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 4 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 3 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 2 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. 1 Setting the gear at 1. A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range. 124 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Gear position display when driving in S mode The current gear is displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 142) ■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode) To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or shift paddle switch is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.) ■ When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control sys- 2 tem ■ Snow mode automatic deactivation Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in snow mode. ■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 392 ■ If does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. (In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.) ■ AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.) 125 When driving The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4. (P. 152, 155) 2-1. Driving procedures Manual Transmission (if equipped) ■ Shifting the shift lever Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly. ■ Shifting the shift lever into R Shift the shift lever into the R position while lifting up the ring section. Snow mode The snow mode is used for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow. Push the switch once more to return to normal mode. 126 2-1. Driving procedures ■ Maximum downshifting speed Adhere to the downshifting speeds in the following table in order to prevent overrevving the engine. mph (km/h) Maximum speed 1 33 (54) 2 56 (90) 3 83 (134) 4 108 (172) 2 When driving Shift position 127 2-1. Driving procedures Turn signal lever Left turn Right turn Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever. Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever. ■ Turn signals can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out. 128 2-1. Driving procedures Parking brake Automatic transmission CANADA U.S.A. Sets the parking brake* (Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.) *: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot. 2 When driving Manual transmission Sets the parking brake Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal. Releases the parking brake CANADA U.S.A. NOTICE ■ Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. 129 2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type. The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed. Multi-information display P. 139 Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Tacho indicator When the set engine speed is reached, this ring-shaped indicators comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the engine speed reaches a dangerous range. Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature. 130 2-2. Instrument cluster Odometer and trip meter Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently. Speed indicator 2 When driving When the set speed is reached while driving, this ring-shaped indicator comes on in yellow. The indicator comes on in red when the vehicle speed reaches the dangerous range. Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank. Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed. Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Darker Brighter 131 2-2. Instrument cluster Speed and tacho indicators ■ Turning the indicator on/off STEP 1 Bring up the satellite switch mode on the multi-information display. Press , or the “ON/OFF” button. STEP 2 Select the item whose setting is to be changed. Press or to display the item whose setting is to be changed. STEP 3 Change the settings. Press “ON/OFF” button to change the settings (e.g. on/off). 132 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Changing the indicator setting The satellite switch can be used to change the set speed at which the yellow speed or tacho indicator ring comes on. The setting can be made only when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped. STEP 1 2 After one second, the mode enters the indicator setting mode. The speedometer or tachometer needle moves to the previously set speed. 133 When driving Push or to select the speed or tacho indicator set mode. ( ) Turn the speed or tacho indicator to “OFF” and then “ON” by pushing the “ON/ OFF” button. ( ) 2-2. Instrument cluster STEP 2 Push or within 6 seconds of the speedometer or tachometer needle moving to change the setting of the desired speed, then turn the indicator mode to “ON” by pushing the “ON/OFF” button. Pushing and holding the switch changes values at a faster rate. If the satellite switch is not operated for some time, the multi-information display returns to its previously displayed content. The yellow indicator is displayed to indicate that the desired speed has been set. ■ Speed indicator display conditions and vehicle speed setting range Vehicle speed setting range: Approximately 30 to 100 mph (approximately 50 to 160 km/h) When the maximum speed is selected, the speed indicator comes on only in red. ■ Tacho indicator display conditions and engine speed setting range Engine rpm setting range: Approximately 2000 to 6500 rpm (r/min) When the maximum rpm is selected, the tacho indicator comes on only in red. 134 2-2. Instrument cluster NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components ● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi- cates the maximum engine speed. ● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 400) 2 When driving 135 2-2. Instrument cluster Indicators and warning lights The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems. Instrument cluster The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may differ depending on the model/type. Center panel 136 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems. Turn signal indicator (P. 128) (U.S.A.) (CANADA) Headlight indicator (P. 143) (vehicles with a manual transmission) (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Tail light indicator (P. 143) Front fog light indicator (P. 146) “ECT SNOW” indicator (P. 123) 2 “ETCS SNOW” indicator (P. 126) When driving Headlight high beam indicator (P. 143) (vehicles with an automatic transmission) “ECT PWR” indicator (P. 123) Cruise control indicator (P. 152) * “AFS OFF” indicator light (P. 144) (if equipped) (if equipped) (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Shift position and shift range indicators (P. 122) Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 164) * Slip indicator (P. 171) * “VSC OFF” indicator (P. 172) * SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 90) 137 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 360) * * * (U.S.A.) * * (Canada) * (U.S.A.) * * (Canada) (Canada) * * * (U.S.A.) * (if equipped) *: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs. 138 2-2. Instrument cluster Multi-information display The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature. ● Trip information (P. 140) Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information. ● Satellite switch mode display (P. 245) 2 When driving This switch is used to configure various function settings. ● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist. ● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) (P. 155) Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control. ● Warning messages (P. 369) Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. 139 2-2. Instrument cluster Trip information Without navigation system Display items can be switched by pushing the “DISP” switch. With navigation system ■ Outside temperature Displays the outside air temperature. The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40F (40C) to 122F (50C). When the temperature drops to 37F (3C), the digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds. 140 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Driving range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining. • This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. • When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. 2 ■ Average fuel consumption The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed. ■ Average fuel consumption after refueling Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled. ■ Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption. ■ Average vehicle speed Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset. The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer than one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed. 141 When driving Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset. 2-2. Instrument cluster ■ Gear position display (vehicles with an automatic transmission only) Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears that is available when the shift lever is in the S or D position. the gear range is shown by the number of dots () and the current gear is shown as a number. The transmission automatically selects the gears within the driver selected gear range. In the illustration to the left, a range of 6 available gears (1 through 6) has been selected by the driver. (The shift lever is in the D or S position with 6 ranges enabled) It is possible for the transmission to automatically select between all 6 of the gears. In this case, the transmission has selected third gear. ■ System check display After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, “CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, “COMPLETED” is displayed before returning to the normal screen. CAUTION ■ The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in personal death or injury. 142 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight switch The headlights can be operated manually or automatically. U.S.A. CANADA The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above turn on. 2 When driving The headlights and parking lights turn on and off automatically. (When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode) Turning on the high beam headlights With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams. Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off. Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams. Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off. 143 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers AFS (vehicles with discharge headlights) AFS (Adaptive Front—lighting System) improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input. Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher. ■ Deactivating AFS How to switch: P. 245 turns on when the AFS is deactivated. ■ Daytime running light system To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. ■ Headlight control sensor The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction. 144 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Automatic light off system ● When the headlights comes on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec- onds after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off immediately if on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.) ● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and driver’s door is opened. To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or . The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. ■ If flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights) It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 145 When driving ■ Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights) 2 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Fog light switch The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam. To turn the front fog lights off To turn the front fog lights on 146 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers and washer ■ Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped) Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when “INT” is selected). Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment (increase) Intermittent windshield wiper interval adjustment (decrease) Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation Wash/wipe operation 2 When driving Wipers operate automatically. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.) 147 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped) With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed. Sensor sensitivity (low) Sensor sensitivity (high) Rain-sensing wiper operation Low speed wiper operation High speed wiper operation Temporary operation Wash/wipe operation Wipers operate automatically. (After operating several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.) ■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in “AUTO” mode. ● Intermittent wiper interval (“INT” mode) ● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs) With “LO” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary. (However, the mode cannot be switched when the adjustment dial for the intermittent wiper interval is set to the lowest setting.) 148 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers ■ Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers) The sensor judges the amount of raindrops. ■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper opera- 2 tion ■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) CAUTION ■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers. 149 When driving The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the windshield wipers. 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers NOTICE ■ When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield. ■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually. ■ When using an automatic car wash Set the wiper switch to “OFF”. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. 150 2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers Headlight cleaner switch (if equipped) Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights. Press the switch to clean the headlights. 2 When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on. NOTICE ■ When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat. 151 When driving ■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when 2-4. Using other driving systems Cruise control (if equipped) Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator. ■ Set the vehicle speed STEP 1 Turn the “ON-OFF” button on. Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control. STEP 2 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set the cruise control speed. ■ Adjusting the speed setting Increase speed Decrease speed Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained. Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it. 152 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration Cancel Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied or the clutch (manual transmission) is depressed. 2 Resume When driving To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up. ■ Cruise control can be set when ● The shift lever is in the D or 4, 5 or 6 range of S. (vehicles with an automatic transmission) ● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). ■ Accelerating The vehicle can be accelerated normally. ■ Automatic cruise control cancellation The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h) ● VSC is activated 153 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use. ■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● On steep hills ● On winding roads 154 2-4. Using other driving systems Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped) Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead. ■ Select cruise mode Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode 2 When driving Turn the “ON-OFF” button on. Push the button once more to deactivate. Selecting conventional constant speed control mode Turn the “ON-OFF” button on. Push the button once more to deactivate. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to IGNITION ON mode. Switch to constant speed control mode. (push and hold for approximately one second) 155 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press the lever down to set. ■ Adjusting the speed setting Increase speed Decrease speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed. Fine Adjustment (1mph increments) Momentarily move lever in desired direction and release Coarse adjustment increments) (5mph Hold the lever in the desired direction Coarse adjustment will continue to change the set speed approximately 5mph per second until the lever is released. 156 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting Cancel Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control. The setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied. Resume 2 When driving To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up. ■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Each push of the switch changes Preceding the vehicle-to-vehicle distance vehicle mark Long Medium Short The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to IGNITION ON mode. A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle if a vehicle is running ahead of you. 157 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 328 ft. (100 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles. Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes. Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h) The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch. Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead. Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) 158 2-4. Using other driving systems The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising. Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (P. 369) ■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when ● The shift lever is in D or the 4, 5 or 6 range of S. ● Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph (135 km/h). ■ Accelerating The vehicle can be accelerated normally. ■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations. ● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) ● VSC is activated ● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way. ● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed. ● The “ECT SNOW” switch is set to snow mode. If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. 159 When driving ■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers 2 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations. ● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. ● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) ● VSC is activated ■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/ decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance Long Approximately 164 ft. (50 m) Medium Approximately 132 ft. (40 m) Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m) ■ Radar sensor and grille cover Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.) Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected. Grille cover Radar sensor 160 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Certification For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF exposure information This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements. 2 For vehicles sold in Canada (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION ■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc. ■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use. 161 When driving Operation is subject to the following two conditions; 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident. ● In heavy traffic ● On roads with sharp bends ● On winding roads ● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow ● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients ● At entrances to expressways ● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.) ● Where buzzer can be heard often ■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you. As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (P. 369) will not be activated, and an accident may result. ● Vehicles that cut in suddenly ● Vehicles traveling at low speeds ● Vehicles that are not moving ● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.) ● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane 162 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result. ● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function- ing of the sensor ● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.) 2 ● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow ■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident. ● Stick or attach anything to them ● Leave them dirty ● Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks ● Modify or paint them ● Replace them with non-genuine parts 163 When driving ● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable 2-4. Using other driving systems Intuitive parking assist (if equipped) The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details. ■ Types of sensors Front corner sensors Rear corner sensors Back sensors ■ Multi-information display (P. 139) Front corner sensor operation Rear corner sensor operation Back sensor operation 164 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Intuitive parking assist switch (P. 245) When on, an indicator is displayed to inform the driver that the function is operational. 2 ■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle. Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) from the obstacle Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm) to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obstacle Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the obstacle 165 When driving The display and buzzer system 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle. Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 4.9 ft. (150 cm) from the obstacle Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle Flashing: Within 1.1 ft. (35 cm) of the obstacle ■ Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating. ● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously. • Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm) • Back sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) ● When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle. 166 2-4. Using other driving systems Detection range of the sensors Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle. 2 The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc. When driving 167 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Sensor detection information ● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. • • • • • • There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. The sensor is frozen. The sensor is covered in any way. The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side. On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass. The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves. • There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity. • The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain. • The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna. • Towing eyelets are installed. • The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. • The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb. • In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they are. ● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu- lar attention to the following obstacles. • • • • • Wires, fences, ropes etc. Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves Sharply-angled objects Low obstacles Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle ■ When the display flashes and a message is displayed P. 369 ■ Certification (Canada only) This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. 168 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) CAUTION ■ Caution when using the intuitive parking sensor Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. 2 ● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). When driving ● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range. NOTICE ■ Notes when washing the vehicle Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. 169 2-4. Using other driving systems Driving assist systems To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. ■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface. ■ Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation. ■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces. ■ TRAC (Traction Control) Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels (2WD models) or all wheels (AWD models) from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. ■ Hill-start assist control (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope. ■ EPS (Electric Power Steering) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel. 170 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management) (IS350) Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, and EPS systems. Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes and engine output. ■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) P. 176 2 If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or if the rear wheels (2WD) or 4 wheels (AWD) spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/ TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged. A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating. The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system is operating. 171 When driving When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating 2-4. Using other driving systems To disable TRAC and/or VSC If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. ■ Turning off TRAC Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC. The slip indicator light should come on. Push the button again to turn the system back on. ■ Turning off TRAC and VSC Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC and VSC. The slip indicator light and “VSC OFF” indicator light should come on. Push the button again to turn the system back on. 172 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them. ■ Automatic TRAC reactivation If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. ■ Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases. assist control systems ● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems. ● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat- ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. • • • • Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. 173 When driving ■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start 2 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ Hill-start assist control is operational when ● The shift lever is in the D or S position. ● The brake pedal is not depressed. ■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine OFF. The system should return to normal within 10 minutes. CAUTION ■ The ABS does not operate effectively when ● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded. ● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road. ■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi- tions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations. ● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads ● When driving with tire chains ● When driving over bumps in the road ● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads 174 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost. ■ If hill-start assist control does not operate effectively (vehicles with an automatic transmission) The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice. The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds. ■ When TRAC and VSC are off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As there are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary. ■ Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire pressure level. The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels. ■ Handling of tires and suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction. 175 When driving ■ When the VSC is activated 2 2-4. Using other driving systems PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped) Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision. ■ Pre-collision seat belts The seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is increased (P. 53), to provide even greater constraining force to protect the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected. ■ Pre-collision brake assist Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. Radar sensor Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles. Grille cover Radar sensor ■ Obstacles not detected The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts. 176 2-4. Using other driving systems ■ The pre-collision system is operational when ● Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor) • Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h). • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Seat belts (linked to brake operation) • Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h). • The system detects sudden braking or skidding. • The front occupants are wearing a seat belt. ● Brake Assist 2 ■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision ● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve ● When driving over a narrow iron bridge ● When there is a metal object on the road surface ● When driving on an uneven road surface ● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn ● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten. ■ When there is a malfunction in the system Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 360, 369) 177 When driving • Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h). • The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h). • The brake pedal is depressed. 2-4. Using other driving systems CAUTION ■ Handling the radar sensor Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively. ● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times. Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them. ● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer. ● Do not disassemble the sensor. ● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding area. ■ Limitations of the pre-collision system Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards. 178 2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. ● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. ● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. ● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. 2 When driving Capacity and distribution Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants) Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150) = 650 lbs.) (5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 179 2-5. Driving information (6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. Example on your vehicle Cargo capacity Total load capacity When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (375 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows: 825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (375 kg —166 kg = 209 kg) In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows: 459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (209 kg — 176 kg = 33 kg) As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. 180 2-5. Driving information CAUTION ■ Storage precautions ● Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident. ● Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants. one during an accident or sudden braking. ■ Capacity and distribution ● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating. ● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury. 181 When driving ● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some- 2 2-5. Driving information Vehicle load limits Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. ■ Total load capacity: 825 lb. (375 kg) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. ■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. ■ Towing capacity Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. ■ Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. ■ Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 316) CAUTION ■ Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident. 182 2-5. Driving information Winter driving tips Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. ■ Pre-winter preparations ● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures. • • • • Engine oil Engine coolant Washer fluid Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. ● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires. 2 When driving Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand, and that chains match the size of the tires. ■ Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions. ● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. ● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. ● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. ● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes. 183 2-5. Driving information ■ When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. ■ When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. Selecting snow chains Snow chains can be mounted on 16- and 17-inch tires. They cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires. Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire sizes. Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter) Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter) Regulations on the use of snow chains ● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. ● Install the chains on the rear tires. ● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km). 184 2-5. Driving information ■ Snow chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains. ● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. ● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on front tires. ● Install the tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km). ● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions. ■ Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. ● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle. ● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. ● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels. ■ Driving with snow chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. ● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. ● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. ● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained. 185 When driving CAUTION 2 2-5. Driving information NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire air pressure sensor. ■ Fitting tire chains The tire air pressure sensor may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted. 186 2-5. Driving information Trailer towing Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers. 2 When driving 187 2-5. Driving information Dinghy towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. NOTICE ■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. 188 2-5. Driving information Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual transmission) Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home. 2 When driving Towing your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures before towing. STEP 1 STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to neutral. Switch to ACCESSORY mode. (P. 119) Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices have been turned OFF. STEP 3 Release the parking brake. After towing, leave the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before driving the vehicle. ■ Necessary equipment and accessories Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Contact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recommended equipment. 189 2-5. Driving information NOTICE ■ Dinghy towing direction Do not tow the vehicle backwards. Doing so may cause serious damage. ■ To prevent the steering from locking Ensure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY mode. 190 Interior features 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ................ 192 Automatic air conditioning system ...................................... 192 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ............................. 200 3-2. Using the audio system........................... 201 Audio system type................... 201 Using the radio....................... 204 Using the CD player ............... 211 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs............................. 217 Optimal use of the audio system ..................................... 225 Using the AUX adapter...... 228 Using the steering wheel audio switches ...................... 229 3-3. Using the interior lights .............................. 231 Interior lights list...................... 231 • Interior lights ........................ 234 • Personal lights...................... 234 3 3-4. Using the storage features ........................ 236 List of storage features......... 236 • Glove box.............................. 236 • Console boxes..................... 237 • Overhead console.............. 238 • Cup holders.......................... 239 • Bottle holders/ door pockets ......................... 241 3-5. Other interior features ........................ 242 Sun visors ................................. 242 Vanity mirror ........................... 243 Clock......................................... 244 Satellite switches ................... 245 Ashtrays.................................... 248 Cigarette lighter.................... 249 Power outlet ............................ 250 Seat heaters ............................. 251 Seat heaters and ventilators ............................. 253 Armrest .................................... 255 Rear sunshade ........................ 256 Trunk storage extension ...... 258 Coat hooks .............................. 259 Floor mat .................................. 260 Trunk features........................... 261 Garage door opener ............ 264 Compass ................................... 269 191 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Automatic air conditioning system Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system Fan speed Fan speed display Off Driver’s side temperature setting display Automatic mode Airflow display Changes the air outlets used Passenger’s side temperature setting display Micro dust and pollen filter Passenger’s side temperature control Driver's side temperature control Front windshield defogger Dual operation switch Air conditioning on/off switch Outside air or recirculated mode Using the automatic mode STEP 1 Press . The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting. STEP 2 Press to switch to automatic mode. (IS350 only) Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. 192 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger STEP 3 Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the temperature on . The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately. Adjusting the settings ■ Adjusting the temperature setting Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the temperature on . to separately adjust the temper- ature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous mode). The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed. ■ Adjusting the fan speed Press (increase) or (decrease) on Press . to turn the fan off. 193 Interior features Press (increase) or (decrease) on 3 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Changing the air outlets Press . The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed. * * * * Air flows to the upper body. Air flows to the upper body and feet. Air flows to the feet. Air flows to the feet and the front windshield defogger operates. *: Only in the automatic mode 194 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes IS250 Press . The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle) and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the button is pressed. IS350 Press . The mode switches among (recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO” and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the button is pressed. When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically. Defogging The air conditioning system control operates automatically. Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode. 195 Interior features Defogging the front windshield 3 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Micro dust and pollen filter Press . Outside air mode switches to (recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body. To stop the operation, press again. Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode (IS350 only) STEP 1 Press onds. STEP 2 Press (increase) or (decrease) on for 2 or more sec- . From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set. 196 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets Center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob up to open the vent and down to close the vent Front outlets (right and left side) 3 Rear outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob fully to the outside of the vehicle to close the vent 197 Interior features Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down Turn the knob right to open the vent and left to close the vent 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger ■ Using the automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur. ● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer. ● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow. ● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on. ■ Using the system in recirculated air mode The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period. ■ Window defogger feature Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to ations where the windows need to be defogged. (outside air) mode in situ- ■ When outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C) The air conditioning system may not operate even when ■ When the indicator light on is pressed. flashes Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ Automatic mode for air intake control (IS350 only) In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes. ■ Micro dust and pollen filter ● In order to prevent the window from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur. • Outside air mode does not switch to . • The air conditioning system operates automatically. • The operation cancels after 1 minute. ● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press 198 . 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger CAUTION ■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision. NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped. 3 Interior features 199 3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. On/off The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION ■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot and burn you. 200 3-2. Using the audio system Audio system type With navigation system Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. Without navigation system (type A) CD player with changer and AM/FM radio 3 Interior features Without navigation system (type B) CD player with changer and AM/FM radio 201 3-2. Using the audio system Title Page Using the radio P. 204 Using the CD player P. 211 Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 217 Optimal use of the audio system P. 225 Using the AUX adapter P. 228 Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 229 ■ Using cellular phones Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating. CAUTION ■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada ● Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC Warning: Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device. ● Laser products • Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages. • This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 202 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off. ■ To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system. 3 Interior features 203 3-2. Using the audio system Using the radio Seeking any traffic program station Station selector Displays radio text messages Adjusting the frequency (AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode) Changing the program types Power Volume Seeking the frequency AMSAT/FM mode buttons Scans for receivable stations Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) STEP 1 on STEP 2 or pressing or Search for desired stations by turning . Press and hold the button (from be set to, and you hear a beep. to ) the station is to Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) ■ Scanning the preset radio stations STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each. STEP 2 204 When the desired station is reached, press the button once again. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Scanning all radio stations within range STEP 1 Press . All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each. STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press the button once again. RDS (Radio Data System) This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information. ■ Receiving RDS broadcasts STEP 1 Press or on 3 during FM reception. Interior features The type of program changes each time the button is pressed. ● ROCK ● EASYLIS (Easy listening) ● CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz) ● R & B (Rhythm and Blues) ● INFORM (Information) ● RELIGION ● MISC (Miscellaneous) ● ALERT (Emergency messages) If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display. STEP 1 Press , or or on . The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type. 205 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Displaying radio station names Press . ■ Displaying radio text messages Press twice. If MSG shows in the display, a text message will be displayed. If the text continues past the end of the display, hold until you hear a beep. is displayed. Press and XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) ■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio STEP 1 Press and hold until SAT shows in the display. The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. AM SAT1 SAT2 SAT3 STEP 2 Turn to select the desired channel in the all categories or press or on to select the desired channel in the current category. ■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to (from to ), and you hear a beep. ■ Changing the channel category Press or on 206 . 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels ● Scanning channels in the current category Press . STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the switch again. ● Scanning preset channels STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the switch again. ■ Displaying text information Press . STEP 1 3 The display will show up to 10 characters. Interior features The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed. ● CH NAME ● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) ● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) ● CH NUMBER 207 3-2. Using the audio system ■ When the battery is disconnected Stations presets are erased. ■ Reception sensitivity ● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc. ● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window. ■ XM® Satellite Radio An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces. ● XM® subscriptions For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe: U.S.A. Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987. Canada Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. ● Radio ID You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob- lem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number will appear. ● Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. 208 3-2. Using the audio system ■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action. “ANTENNA” The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® antenna cable is attached securely. There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels. “NO SIGNAL” “LOADING” The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio. The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. “OFF AIR” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. “-----” There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. 209 Interior features “UPDATING” 3 3-2. Using the audio system “---” The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada). ■ Certifications for the radio tuner This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following: ● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 210 3-2. Using the audio system Using the CD player Repeat play Displays text message Random playback Power Volume 3 Track selection Search playback Selecting a CD Interior features CD eject Playback CD insert Loading CDs ■ Loading a CD STEP 1 Push . “WAIT” is shown on the display. STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. ■ Loading multiple CDs STEP 1 Press and hold until you hear a beep. “WAIT” is shown on the display. STEP 2 Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green. The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”. The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted. 211 3-2. Using the audio system STEP 3 Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green again. Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs. To stop the operation, press . Ejecting CDs ■ Ejecting a CD To select the CD to be ejected, STEP 1 press or on . The number of the CD selected is shown on the display. Press and remove the CD. ■ Ejecting all the CDs Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs. STEP 2 Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks ■ Selecting a track Press to move up and to move down using until the desired track number is displayed. To fast forward or reverse, press and hold or on . ■ Scanning a CD STEP 1 Press . The first ten seconds of each track will be played. STEP 2 212 Press the switch again when the desired track is reached. 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting a CD ■ To select a CD to play To select the desired CD, press or on ■ To scan loaded CDs STEP 1 Press and hold . until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played. STEP 2 Press the switch again when the desired CD is reached. Random playback 3 Interior features ■ Current CD Press (RAND). Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled. ■ All CDs Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the button is pressed once more. Switching the display Press . Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./ Elapsed time CD title Track name. 213 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press (RAND), (RPT), or again. ■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display “LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD. “ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert it in the player. “WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back. ■ Discs that can be used Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. ■ CD player protection feature To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected. ■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri- ods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. 214 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm). 3 ● Low-quality and deformed CDs. recording area. ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off. 215 Interior features ● CDs with a transparent or translucent 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time. 216 3-2. Using the audio system Playing back MP3 and WMA discs Repeat play Selecting a folder Random playback Displays text message Selecting a file Power Volume Selecting a CD CD insert Interior features Selecting Playback a file Search playback CD eject 3 Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (P. 211) Selecting a folder ■ Selecting folders one at a time Press () or () to select the desired folder. ■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is reached, press the switch once again. ■ Returning to the first folder Press and hold () until you hear a beep. 217 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting files ■ Selecting one file at a time or press or on Turn to select the desired file. ■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder Press . When the desired file is reached, press the switch once again. File repeat Press (RPT). Folder repeat Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep. Random playback ■ To play files from a particular folder in random order Press (RAND). ■ To play all of the files on a disc in random order Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep. Switching the display Press . Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3 only) Track title Artist name. 218 3-2. Using the audio system ■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback Press (RAND), (RPT), or again. ■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display. “LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD. “ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert it in the player. “WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still cannot be played back. “NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD. ■ CD player protection feature ■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri- ods CDs may be damaged and may not play properly. ■ Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player. 219 3 Interior features To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used. 3-2. Using the audio system ■ MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows MediaTM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used. ● MP3 file compatibility • Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) • Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps) * Compatible with VBR • Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural ● WMA file compatibility • Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) • Compatible bit rates Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps) * Only compatible with 2-channel playback ● Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints. 220 3-2. Using the audio system ● Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used. 221 3 Interior features • Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 • File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. • Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels • Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters • Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) • Maximum number of files per disc: 255 ● File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma. ● Multi-sessions As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played. ● ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags. 3-2. Using the audio system ● MP3 and WMA playback When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played. ● Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. ● Playback • To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. • CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc. • There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. • Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. 222 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs. Doing so may damage the CD player and render the CD insert/eject function unusable. ● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm) 3 ● Low-quality and deformed CDs Interior features ● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area ● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off 223 3-2. Using the audio system NOTICE ■ CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the CDs or the player itself. ● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. ● Do not apply oil to the CD player. ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight. ● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player. ● Do not insert more than one CD at a time. 224 3-2. Using the audio system Optimal use of the audio system Type A Adjusting the sound quality Adjusting the ASL Changing the listening position Changing the sound quality modes 3 Interior features Type B Adjusting the sound quality Adjusting the ASL Changing the sound quality modes 225 3-2. Using the audio system Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) Press . The ASL switches between on and off modes each time the switch is pressed. ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle. Changing the listening position (type A only) The sound feel setting can be changed to produce the best sound for each listening position. Press (position selector) to change the setting. The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed. Display Listening position “DRIVER” Position best suited to the driver’s seat “FRONT” Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger seats “REAR” Position best suited to the rear seats “ALL” Position best suited to all seats Adjusting sound quality and volume balance ■ Changing sound quality modes Press Pressing the button changes the sound mode in the following order. “BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAd”“BAL”“SURROUND” (type B only) ■ Adjusting sound quality Press 226 or to adjust the level. 3-2. Using the audio system Mode displayed Level Bass* “BAS” -5 to 5 Mid-range* “MID” -5 to 5 Treble* “TRE” -5 to 5 Front/rear volume balance “FAd” Left/right volume balance Surround (type B only) Press Press Low High F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front “BAL” L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right “SURROUND” On/off Off On *: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each AMFM or CD mode. ■ Surround (type B only) When the surround mode is on, the matrix 7.1 surround sound system provides a realistic sound field. 227 3 Interior features Sound quality mode 3-2. Using the audio system Using the AUX adapter This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers. Connect the portable audio device. STEP 1 STEP 2 Press . ■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself. ■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device. 228 3-2. Using the audio system Using the steering wheel audio switches Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel. Power on, select audio source Volume Radio: Select radio stations CD: Select tracks, files (MP3 and WMA) and discs 3 Turning on the power when the audio system is turned off. The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 second or more. Changing the audio source Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed. FM1FM2CD changerAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3 Adjusting the volume Press + on to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume. Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume. 229 Interior features Press 3-2. Using the audio system Selecting a radio station STEP 1 Press to select the radio mode. STEP 2 Press or on to select a radio station. To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep. Selecting a track/file STEP 1 Press to select the CD mode. STEP 2 Press or on to select the desired track/file. Selecting a disc in the CD player STEP 1 Press to select the CD mode. STEP 2 Press and hold or on until a beep is heard. CAUTION ■ To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel. 230 3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights list Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode. 3 Interior features Front personal lights (P. 234) Front interior light (P. 234) Front overhead courtesy light Rear personal lights (P. 234) Rear interior light Rear overhead courtesy light Shift lever lighting (when “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode) Front foot well lighting 231 3-3. Using the interior lights Front door courtesy lighting Front scuff lighting (if equipped) Outer foot lights Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the shift lever lighting and front foot well lighting. 232 3-3. Using the interior lights ■ Illuminated entry system The following interior lights come on automatically when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person. Note that the illuminated entry system operates only when the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on. ● Front overhead courtesy light ● Rear overhead courtesy light ● Outer foot light The following lights turn on when any of the doors is unlocked or opened. ● Front interior light ● Rear interior lights ● Front foot well lighting 3 ● Front door courtesy lighting The following lights turn on for approximately 15 seconds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF from the IGNITION ON or ACCESSORY mode. (The lights turn off immediately if the doors are locked or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is set to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.) ● Front overhead courtesy light ● Rear overhead courtesy light ■ To prevent the battery from being discharged If the overhead courtesy lights and interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. ■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 436) 233 Interior features ● Front scuff lighting 3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights and personal lights Interior lights Models without an electric moon roof Door position on/off On/off Models with an electric moon roof Door position on/off On/off Personal lights Front (models without an electric moon roof) On/off 234 3-3. Using the interior lights Personal lights Front (models with an electric moon roof) On/off Rear On/off 3 Interior features 235 3-4. Using the storage features List of storage features Glove box Glove box Console boxes Cup holders Bottle holders/door pockets Overhead console Glove box Open (push button) Lock with the mechanical key Unlock with the mechanical key 236 3-4. Using the storage features Glove box and console boxes ■ Glove box light The glove box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Trunk opener main switch The trunk opener main switch located in the glove box. ( P. 41) CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 3 Front Pull up the knob to release the lock. Slide armrest. Pull up the knob to release the lock. Lift the armrest to open. Rear (if equipped) Press the button to release the lock. Lift the armrest to open. 237 Interior features Console boxes 3-4. Using the storage features Console boxes and overhead console ■ Console box light (front) The console box light turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ Using the front console box to store CD cases Store a CD case with the hinged portion facing either the front or back of the console box. CAUTION ■ Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Overhead console The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items. 238 3-4. Using the storage features Overhead console and cup holders CAUTION ■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console. If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or become cracked. ■ Caution while driving Do not leave the overhead console open while driving. Items may fall out and cause injury. Cup holders 3 Front (type A) Front (type B) Press the knob to release the lock. Slide armrest. 239 Interior features To open, press down and release the front of the cup holder lid. 3-4. Using the storage features Cup holders Rear To open, press in and release the rear cup holder on the rear center armrest. ■ Using the front cup holder (type B) to store small items Remove the cup holder insert holding the base part. CAUTION ■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns. ■ When not in use Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 240 3-4. Using the storage features Bottle holders/door pockets Bottle holders/door pockets The door pocket can be opened and closed. When installing the bottle, close the cap of the bottle. CAUTION 3 ■ Caution while driving Interior features Keep the door pockets closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. 241 3-5. Other interior features Sun visors Forward position: Flip down. Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side. 242 3-5. Other interior features Vanity mirror Slide the cover. The light turns on when the cover is opened. 3 Interior features 243 3-5. Other interior features Clock Adjusts the hour. Adjusts the minutes. Rounds to the nearest hour.* *: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 2:00 ■ The clock is displayed when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 244 3-5. Other interior features Satellite switches The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display. ■ Operating the satellite switches STEP 1 Bring up the satellite switch mode on the multi-information display. Press , or the “ON/OFF” button. STEP 2 Press or to display the item whose setting is to be changed. STEP 3 Change the settings. Press the “ON/OFF” button to change the settings (e.g. on/off). 245 3 Interior features Select the item whose setting is to be changed. 3-5. Other interior features ■ Items that can be set using the satellite switches Intuitive parking assist (P. 164) on/off (if equipped) Tire pressure warning system initialization (P. 308) ID code selection for tire air pressure system (P. 310) AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (P. 144) on/off (if equipped) Vehicle speed indicator on/off and speed setting (P. 132) Tacho indicator on/off and engine speed (rpm) setting (P. 132) 246 3-5. Other interior features ■ Changing the settings Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following conditions: ● Intuitive parking assist: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI- TION ON mode. ● Items other than the above: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped. ■ Display The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not operated for an extended period. Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a warning or when the radar cruise control is used. If this occurs, press any of the satellite switches or “DISP” switch on the steering wheel to return the display to satellite switch mode. 3 Interior features 247 3-5. Other interior features Ashtrays Front Push the back part of the lid to open. Push the lid again to close. Push the lever to remove the ashtray. Rear Pull the ashtray lid to open. Hold the plate down and pull the ashtray upwards to remove. CAUTION ■ When not in use Keep the ashtray closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ■ To prevent fire ● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed. ● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray. 248 3-5. Other interior features Cigarette lighter Push the back part of the lid to open, and push the cigarette lighter down. The cigarette lighter will pop up when it is ready for use. ■ The cigarette lighter can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 3 Interior features CAUTION ■ To avoid burns or fires ● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter. ● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire. ● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet. 249 3-5. Other interior features Power outlet The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A. ■ The power outlet can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit. ■ To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A. ■ To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 250 3-5. Other interior features Seat heaters (if equipped) Vehicles with an automatic transmission Heats the seats Driver’s seat Front passenger’s seat The indicator light comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become. Vehicles with a manual transmission Heats the seats 3 The indicator light comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become. Interior features Driver’s seat Front passenger’s seat ■ The seat heaters can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ When not in use Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off. 251 3-5. Other interior features CAUTION ■ Burns ● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. NOTICE ■ To prevent seat heater damage Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent battery discharge Turn the switches off when the engine is not running. 252 3-5. Other interior features Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped) The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats. Vehicles with an automatic transmission Heats the seats Driver’s seat Front passenger’s seat The indicator light (red) comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become. Blows air from the seats The indicator light (green) comes on. The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes. 3 Heats the seats Interior features Vehicles with a manual transmission Driver’s seat Front passenger’s seat The indicator light (red) comes on. The higher the number, the warmer the seats become. Blows air from the seats The indicator light (green) comes on. The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes. ■ The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. ■ When not in use Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off. 253 3-5. Other interior features CAUTION ■ Burns ● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: • • • • Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) ● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater. Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating. NOTICE ■ To prevent seat heater damage Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. ■ To prevent battery discharge Turn the switches off when the engine is not running. 254 3-5. Other interior features Armrest Pull the armrest down for use. NOTICE 3 ■ To prevent damage to the armrest Do not place too much strain on the armrest. Interior features 255 3-5. Other interior features Rear sunshade (if equipped) The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switch shown below. Raise/lower ■ Reverse operation feature To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when the gear is shifted to R. However, the rear sunshade is raised again if either of the following occurs: ● The switch is pressed again. ● The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch. ■ The rear sunshade can be used when The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode. 256 3-5. Other interior features CAUTION ■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening. They may get caught, causing injury. NOTICE ■ To prevent the battery from being discharged Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running. ■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade Observe the following precautions. 3 ● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components. Interior features ● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations. ● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade. ● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions. ● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time. 257 3-5. Other interior features Trunk storage extension Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area. STEP 1 STEP 2 Pull down the rear seat armrest. Open the inside trunk door from the trunk and load baggage or other items. CAUTION ■ When not in use Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed. In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury. 258 3-5. Other interior features Coat hooks Pull out the hooks to hang coats or other soft items. 3 CAUTION Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury. 259 Interior features ■ Items that must not be hung on the hook 3-5. Other interior features Floor mat Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet. Secure the driver’s floor mat using the hooks provided. CAUTION ■ When inserting the floor mat Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident. ● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct side faces upward. ● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats. 260 3-5. Other interior features Trunk features ■ Cargo hooks Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items. ■ Shopping bag hooks 3 Interior features ■ First-aid kit storage belt Loosen Tighten 261 3-5. Other interior features ■ Warning triangle storage belt Loosen Tighten ■ Luggage mat Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up. The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk. CAUTION ■ When the cargo hooks are not in use To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use. 262 3-5. Other interior features NOTICE ■ When closing the trunk Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk. The luggage mat may get damaged. 3 Interior features 263 3-5. Other interior features Garage door opener The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, and other devices. The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink. Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners) The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device. Indicator Buttons ■ Programming the HomeLink STEP 1 Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink control buttons. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming. 264 3-5. Other interior features STEP 2 STEP 3 Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink and the button on the transmitter. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. STEP 4 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. 265 3 Interior features If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. 3-5. Other interior features ■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners) If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the steps listed below. STEP 1 Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button. STEP 2 STEP 3 Press the training button. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink transceiver and operate the garage door. Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink. STEP 4 Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming. STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 266 Press and hold the selected HomeLink button. Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete. When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons. 3-5. Other interior features Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink buttons. ■ Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. STEP 5 ■ Reprogramming a button The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the programming instructions. Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator light on the HomeLink transceiver should turn on. The HomeLink continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed. Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs) Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory. 267 Interior features Operating the HomeLink 3 3-5. Other interior features ■ Before programming ● Install a new battery in the transmitter. ● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink. ■ Certification for the garage door opener This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device. CAUTION ■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm. ■ Conforming to federal safety standards Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury. 268 3-5. Other interior features Compass The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. ■ Operation To turn the compass on or off, push “AUTO” for longer than 3 seconds. Push and hold the button for 3 seconds or more. 3 ■ Displays and directions Direction “N” North “NE” Northeast “E” East “SE” Southeast “S” South “SW” Southwest “W” West “NW” Northwest Interior features Display 269 3-5. Other interior features Calibrating the compass The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate. To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following. ■ Deviation calibration STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle. Press “AUTO” until a number (1 to STEP 2 15) appears on the compass display. STEP 3 270 Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are. 3-5. Other interior features STEP 4 Press “AUTO” again. If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete. ■ Circling calibration If “CAL” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: ● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. ● The vehicle is on an inclined surface. ● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer- ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.). ● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.) ● The battery has been disconnected. ● A door is open. 271 Interior features ■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation 3 3-5. Other interior features CAUTION ■ While driving the vehicle Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. ■ When doing the circling calibration Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration. NOTICE ■ To avoid the compass malfunctions Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor. ■ To ensure normal operation of the compass ● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields. ● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. 272 Maintenance and care 4 4-1. Maintenance and care ............................... 274 Wheels...................................... 320 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.............. 274 Electronic key battery.......... 325 Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior.............. 277 4-2. Maintenance .................. 280 Air conditioning filter ........... 322 Checking and replacing fuses ........................................ 327 Headlight aim .......................... 341 Light bulbs................................ 342 Maintenance requirements ....................... 280 General maintenance ......... 282 Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs............................... 285 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ................ 286 Do-it-yourself service precautions ........................... 286 Hood ......................................... 289 Positioning a floor jack ......... 290 Engine compartment............ 292 Tires............................................ 306 Tire inflation pressure ............ 316 273 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition. ● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust. Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois. ● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Wipe away any water. ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates. If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool. ■ Automatic car washes ● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. ● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint. ■ High pressure car washes ● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. ● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop- erly. ■ Aluminum wheels Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint. ■ Bumpers and side moldings Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. 274 4-1. Maintenance and care ■ Outside rear view mirror rain-clearing coating Observe the following precautions in order to retain the rain-clearing properties of the mirror. ● Clean the mirrors using car shampoo or glass cleaner that does not contain sili- cone or an abrasive compound, and rinse thoroughly with water. ● Allow the mirrors to be exposed to direct sunlight for 1 to 2 days. ■ To prevent deterioration and do by corrosion ● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: • • • • • After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances • If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud • If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface ● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. ■ Caution about the exhaust pipe Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns. 275 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline. ■ Cleaning the exterior lights ● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. ● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. ■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first. ■ When using an automatic car wash “OFF” 276 Set the wiper switch to “OFF”. If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged. 4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition: ■ Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water. ■ Cleaning the leather areas ● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. ● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent. Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent. ● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent. ● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area. ● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. ● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth. 277 Maintenance and care ■ Synthetic leather areas ● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. 4 4-1. Maintenance and care ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires. ■ Caring for leather areas Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior. ■ Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible. ■ Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. CAUTION ■ Water in the vehicle ● Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor. ● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 79) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury. 278 4-1. Maintenance and care NOTICE ■ Cleaning detergents Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces. ■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces. ● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately. ● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. ● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly. ■ Water on the floor ■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna. 279 4 Maintenance and care Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust. 4-2. Maintenance Maintenance requirements To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance. ■ General maintenance Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer. ■ Scheduled maintenance Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule. For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ Scheduled Maintenance”. ■ Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage. The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. ■ Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage. 280 4-2. Maintenance ■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer ● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle. ● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. CAUTION ■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. ■ Warning in handling of battery ● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com- ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. ● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo- ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com- pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 302) 281 4 Maintenance and care nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. 4-2. Maintenance General maintenance Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or “Owners Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice. Engine compartment Items 282 Check points Battery Maintenance-free. (P. 302) Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 301) Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 299) Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 295) Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds? Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter? (P. 301) Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 305) 4-2. Maintenance Vehicle interior Items Check points Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)? Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism • Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in P? Brake pedal • Moves smoothly? • Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play? Brakes • Not pull to one side when applied? • Loss of brake effectiveness? • Spongy feeling brake pedal? • Pedal almost touches floor? • Move smoothly and lock securely? Indicators/buzzers • Function properly? Lights • Do all the lights come on? • Headlights aimed correctly? (P. 341) Parking brake • Moves smoothly? • Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline? Seat belts • Does the seat belt system operate smoothly? • Are the belts undamaged? Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly? Maintenance and care Head restraints 4 283 4-2. Maintenance Items Steering wheel Check points • Moves smoothly? • Has correct free play? • No strange noises? Vehicle exterior Items Check points Door/trunk • Operate smoothly? Engine hood • The lock system works properly? Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking? Tire • Inflation pressure is correct? • Tire surfaces not worn or damaged? • Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule? • Wheel nuts are not loose? CAUTION ■ If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks. 284 4-2. Maintenance Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. ■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: ● When the battery is disconnected or discharged Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set. ● When the fuel tank cap is loose 4 ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times. ■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing. 285 Maintenance and care The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Do-it-yourself service precautions If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections. Items Battery condition Brake fluid level Engine coolant level 286 Parts and tools (P. 302) • Warm water • Baking soda • Grease • Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) (P. 301) • FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid • Rag or paper towel • Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid) (P. 299) • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. For the U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. • Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Items Parts and tools Engine oil level (P. 295) • “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent • Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil) Fuses (P. 327) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original Tire inflation pressure (P. 316) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source Headlight aim (P. 341) • Phillips-head screwdriver Radiator and condenser Washer fluid (P. 301) (P. 305) • Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) • Funnel The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. ■ When working on the engine compartment: ● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. ● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv- ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot. ● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment. ● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable. ● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. 287 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 301) ■ Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes. NOTICE ■ If you remove the air cleaner: Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment. 288 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Hood Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood. STEP 1 Pull the hood release lever. The hood will pop up slightly. STEP 2 Lift the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. 4 ■ Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury. 289 Maintenance and care CAUTION 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Positioning a floor jack When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury. ■ Front 2WD AWD ■ Rear 290 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When raising your vehicle: Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury. ● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration. ● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. ● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the floor jack. Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level, surface. 4 ● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. lever in P (automatic) or R (manual). ● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. ● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack. 291 Maintenance and care ● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment IS350 Battery (P. 302) Engine oil level dipstick (P. 295) Engine oil filler cap (P. 295) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 301) Fuse boxes (P. 327) 292 Washer fluid tank (P. 305) Electric cooling fans Condenser (P. 301) Radiator (P. 301) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 299) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance IS250 4 Washer fluid tank Maintenance and care Battery (P. 302) Engine oil level dipstick (P. 295) Engine oil filler cap (P. 295) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 301) Fuse boxes (P. 327) (P. 305) Electric cooling fans Condenser (P. 301) Radiator (P. 301) Engine coolant reservoir (P. 299) 293 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine compartment cover ■ Removing the engine compartment cover Front Outside ■ Installing the clips Press the tip of the clip against a hard surface, such as a desk, to allow the center part of the clip to be pushed up. Insert Press 294 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Engine oil With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. ■ Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. Hold a rag under the end and pull STEP 2 the dipstick out. 4 STEP 3 STEP 5 STEP 6 295 Maintenance and care STEP 4 Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully. Low Full 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil. Oil grade Items STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 ILSAC multi-grade engine oil Clean funnel Remove the oil filler cap. Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise. It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp.qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on the dipstick. 296 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Recommended viscosity SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather. Outside temperature *: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change. ■ How to read oil container labels Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil. 4 Maintenance and care 297 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Engine oil consumption ● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. ● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre- quent acceleration and deceleration. ● A new engine consumes more oil. ● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. ● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000 km) ● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer. ■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only) The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures: STEP 1 Switch the display to the odometer (P. 130) when the engine is running. STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays 000000. CAUTION ■ Used engine oil ● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. ● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis- pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. ● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children. 298 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ To prevent serious engine damage: Check the oil level on regular basis. ■ When replacing the engine oil ● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. ● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. ● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. ● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened. Engine coolant The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold. Reservoir cap “FULL” “LOW” 4 299 Maintenance and care If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system. ■ Coolant selection Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C]) Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not remove the radiator cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries. NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label. ■ If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint. 300 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Radiator and condenser Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION ■ When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned. Brake fluid ■ Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank. Maintenance and care Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items. ■ Adding fluid Fluid type Items 4 FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Clean funnel ■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid. 301 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor. NOTICE ■ If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem. Battery Check the battery as follows. ■ Battery exterior Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp 302 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Checking battery condition Check the battery condition using the indicator color. Blue: Good condition White: Charging is necessary. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Before recharging When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: ● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. 4 ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon■ After recharging the battery The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system. STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P (automatic) or depress the brake pedal with the shift lever in N (manual). STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors. STEP 3 Restart the engine. 303 Maintenance and care necting the charger cables to the battery. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Chemicals in the battery: A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery: ● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. ● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. ● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. ● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. ● Keep children away from the battery. ■ Where to safety charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation. ■ How to recharge the battery Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate. ■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte ● If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. ● If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. ● If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. ● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately. 304 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. Washer fluid If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid. 4 CAUTION Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc. NOTICE ■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces. ■ Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank. 305 Maintenance and care ■ When refilling the washer fluid 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tires Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear. ■ Checking tires New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or “” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated. ■ Tire rotation 2WD models with 16-inch tires and AWD models Rotate the tires in the order shown. Front To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation. 2WD models with 18-inch tires Rotate the tires in the order shown. Front 306 To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance 2WD models with 17-inch tires Tires cannot be rotated. ■ The tire pressure warning system Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 362, 370) Directional tires Tire size of turning directional tires Front 225/45R17 90W Rear 245/45R17 95W 307 4 Maintenance and care Tire direction marks The tires listed below are directional. The tire sidewalls are marked with arrows indicating the rolling direction of the tire. If mounted on the wrong side of the vehicle, directional tires will perform poorly. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed. When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 310) Initializing the tire pressure warning system ■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: ● When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures. ● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed. ● When changing the tire size. When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark. 308 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system To initialize the system, use the satellite switch. (P. 245) STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed. STEP 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 415) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level. STEP 3 STEP 4 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode. The tire inflation pressure initialization setting display Continue to press or until the initialization setting display appears. Recording tire inflation pressure settings Press and hold the “ON/OFF” button until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” showing that the initial setting is complete is displayed on the multiinformation display. STEP 5 Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. 309 Maintenance and care It may take several minutes to complete the setting. Wait for several minutes before turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF if necessary. 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Registering and selecting ID codes To select tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes, use the satellite switch. (P. 245) ■ Registering ID codes 2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2ND”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch. There are 2 settings: “MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered. “2ND” position:The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. ■ Selecting ID codes When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. Tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID code settings display Press or repeatedly until the setting display appears. Switching ID codes Press the “ON/OFF” button to switch between “MAIN” and “2ND” ID codes. 310 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires Tires should be replaced if: ● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage ● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. ■ Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction. ■ Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious. ■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires 4 The effectiveness of snow tires is lost. Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains* on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions. *: Tire chains cannot be mounted on 18-inch tires. ■ Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 316, 424). 311 Maintenance and care ■ Low profile tires (models not equipped with 16-inch tires) 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Tire types 1 Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 183) ■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level. ■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn- ing light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display. ● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes. 312 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks. ■ Tire pressure warning system certification For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 313 4 Maintenance and care NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents. ● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear. ● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus. ● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires. ● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires. ■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not press the satellite switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. NOTICE ■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans- mitters When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. 314 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body. ■ Low profile tires and wheels Wheels with profile tires like 17- and 18-inch tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following: ● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely. ● Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage. ■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving 4 Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. Maintenance and care 315 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Tire inflation pressure ■ Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 415) 316 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 4 ■ Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare. 317 Maintenance and care STEP 6 Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Reinstall the tire valve cap. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: ● Reduced fuel efficiency ● Reduced driving comfort and tire life ● Reduced safety ● Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. ■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: ● Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. ● Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling. ● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving. ● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced. 318 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury. ● Excessive wear ● Uneven wear ● Poor handling ● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires ● Poor sealing of the tire bead ● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation ● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards NOTICE 4 ■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure 319 Maintenance and care Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Wheels If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control. ■ Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer. Lexus does not recommend using: • Wheels of different sizes or types • Used wheels • Bent wheels that have been straightened ■ Aluminum wheel precautions ● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels. ● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km). ● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains. ● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels. ■ When replacing wheels The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 308) 320 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ When replacing wheels ● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury. NOTICE ■ Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters ● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer. ● Ensure that only Genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels. 4 Maintenance and care 321 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Air conditioning filter The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency. ■ Removal method STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode. The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode. STEP 2 STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. Open the glove box. Lift and remove the partition. STEP 4 Remove the filter cover. STEP 5 Remove the filter case. 322 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Cleaning method If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side. Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or bar). If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer. ■ Replacement method The “UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up. ■ Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) ■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary. 323 4 Maintenance and care Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance NOTICE ■ To prevent damage to the system ● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed. ● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water. 324 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Electronic key battery Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged. ■ You will need the following items: ● Flathead screwdriver ● Small Phillips-head screwdriver ● Lithium battery (CR1632) ■ Replacing the battery STEP 1 Take out the mechanical key. 4 Remove the cover. STEP 3 Remove the depleted battery. Maintenance and care STEP 2 Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up. 325 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ If the electronic key battery is discharged The following symptoms may occur. ● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly. ● The operational range is reduced. ■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery ● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores. ● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer. ● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. CAUTION ■ Removed battery and other parts Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. NOTICE ■ For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. ● Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. ● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control. ● Do not bend either of the battery terminals. 326 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Checking and replacing fuses If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. STEP 2 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 294) STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment (type A) Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. STEP 1 Engine compartment (type B) 4 327 Maintenance and care Push the tabs in and lift the lid off. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Driver's side instrument panel Remove the lid. Passenger's side instrument panel Remove the lid. STEP 4 STEP 5 328 After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (P. 331) for details about which fuse to check. Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Check if the fuse has blown. Type A STEP 6 Normal fuse Blown fuse Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. 329 4 Maintenance and care Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Type D Normal fuse Blown fuse Contact your Lexus dealer. Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B) Lift the lid off while pushing the tabs on either side. 330 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse layout and amperage ratings ■ Engine compartment (type A) Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 ABS NO.3 25 A 2 PWR HTR 25 A 3 TURN-HAZ 15 A Emergency flashers, turn signals 4 IG2 MAIN 20 A IG2, IGN, GAUGE 5 RAD NO.2 30 A Audio 6 D/C CUT 20 A DOME, MPX-B 7 RAD NO.1 30 A Audio VDIM 4 MPX-B 10 A 9 DOME 10 A Interior lights, meter 331 Maintenance and care 8 Headlights, front fog lights, parking lights, license plate lights, windshield washer, horn, power door lock system, power windows, power seats, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, meter, smart access system with pushbutton start, outside rear view mirrors, air conditioning system, security system 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit FR CTRL-B, ETCS, ALT-S, steering lock system, exhaust system 10 E/G-B 60 A 11 DIESEL GLW 80 A 12 ABS1 50 A VSC, VDIM 13 RH J/B-B 30 A Power door lock system, smart access system with push-button start 14 MAIN 30 A Headlight low beams 15 STARTER 30 A Smart access system with push-button start 16 LH J/B-B 30 A Power door lock system, SECURITY 17 P/I-B 60 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 18 EPS 80 A Power steering 19 ALT 150 A LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, GLW PLG2, HEATER, FAN1, FAN2, DEFOG, ABS2, RH J/B-AM, GLW PLG1, LH J/B-B, RH J/B-B 20 GLW PLG1 50 A PTC heater 21 RH J/B-AM 80 A OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT RH, RAD NO.3, ECU-IG RH, RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG, PWR OUTLET 22 ABS2 30 A VSC 23 DEFOG 50 A Rear window defogger 24 FAN2 40 A Electric cooling fans 25 FAN1 40 A Electric cooling fans 26 HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system 332 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere 27 GLW PLG2 50 A PTC heater 28 E/G-AM 60 A Headlight cleaners, front fog lights, parking lights, air conditioning system 80 A S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV NO.1, A/C, FUEL/OPEN, PSB, FR WIP, H-LP LVL, LH-IG, ECU-IG LH, PANEL, TAIL, MIR HTR, FR S/HTR LH 29 LH J/B-AM Circuit 4 Maintenance and care 333 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Engine compartment (type B) Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 FR CTRL-B 25 A Headlight high beam, horn 2 A/F 15 A Exhaust system 3 ETCS 10 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 4 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system 5 STR LOCK 25 A Steering lock 6 H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner 7 A/C COMP 7.5 A Air conditioning system 8 DEICER 25 A 9 FR CTRL-AM 30 A Front fog lights, parking lights, windshield washer 10 IG2 10 A Ignition system 11 EFI NO.2 10 A Fuel system, exhaust system 12 H-LP R LWR 15 A Headlight low beam (right) 13 H-LP L LWR 15 A Headlight low beam (left) 334 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 14 F/PMP 25 A Fuel system 15 EFI 25 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 16 INJ 20 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system 17 H-LP UPR 15 A Headlight high beams 18 HORN 10 A Horns 19 WASHER 20 A Windshield washer 20 FR TAIL 10 A Parking lights 21 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights 4 Maintenance and care 335 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Driver’s side instrument panel Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power seat 2 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system 3 MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers 4 TV NO.1 10 A Display 5 FUEL OPEN 10 A Fuel filler door opener 6 TV NO.2 7.5 A 7 PSB 30 A Pre-collision seat belt 8 S/ROOF 25 A Electric moon roof 9 TAIL 10 A Tail lights, license plate lights, parking lights 10 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination, air conditioning system, display 11 RR FOG 7.5 A 12 ECU-IG LH 10 A Cruise control, air conditioning system, power steering, rain sensor, antiglare inside rear view mirror, shift lock system, moon roof, tire inflation pressure warning system 13 FR S/HTR LH 15 A Seat heaters and ventilators 336 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 14 RR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows 15 FR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows 16 SECURITY 7.5 A Smart access system with push-button start 17 H-LP LVL 7.5 A AFS 18 LH-IG 10 A Charging system, headlight cleaner, rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, emergency flashers, turn signal lights, back-up lights, stop lights, mirror heaters, sun shade, seat belts, Intuitive parking assist, cruise control, air conditioning system, PTC heater 19 FR WIP 30 A Windshield wipers 4 Maintenance and care 337 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Passenger’s side instrument panel Fuse Ampere Circuit 1 FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power seat 2 DOOR DL 15 A 3 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system 4 STOP SW 7.5 A Stop lights 5 TI & TE 20 A Electric tilt and telescopic steering column 6 RAD NO.3 10 A Audio 7 GAUGE 7.5 A Meter 8 IGN 10 A SRS airbag system, cruise control, steering lock system, fuel system 9 ACC 7.5 A Lexus link system, clock, air conditioning system, audio, display, outside rear view mirrors, smart access system with push-button start 10 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter 11 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlet 12 RR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows 338 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Fuse Ampere Circuit 13 FR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows, outside rear view mirrors 14 AM2 15 A Smart access system with push-button start 15 RH-IG 7.5 A Seat belts, intuitive parking assist, automatic transmission, seat heater and ventilator 16 FR S/HTR RH 15 A Seat heaters and ventilators 10 A Power seats, smart access system with push-button start, AWD system, outside rear view mirrors, VDIM, VSC, air conditioning system, pre-collision seat belt, electric tilt and telescopic steering, power windows, navigation system 17 ECU-IG RH ● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 342) ● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ■ If there is an overload in the circuits The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged. 339 Maintenance and care ■ After a fuse is replaced 4 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire ● Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. ● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. ● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. This can cause extensive damage or even fire. ● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box. NOTICE ■ Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer. 340 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Headlight aim ■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts Adjustment bolt A Adjustment bolt B ■ Before checking the headlight aim STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around the headlight is not deformed. STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground. STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat. STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times. ■ Adjusting the headlight aim Turn bolt A in either direction STEP 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. 4 Maintenance and care Remember the turning direction and the number of turns in mind. STEP 2 Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips-head screwdriver. If the error is over the value specified above, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim. 341 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Light bulbs You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer. ■ Preparing a replacement light bulb Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 420) ■ Removing the engine compartment cover P. 294 ■ Front bulb locations Parking light Headlight high beam ■ Rear bulb locations Back-up light 342 Rear turn signal light 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance Replacing light bulbs ■ Headlight high beams STEP 1 Release the lock and remove the cover. STEP 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 4 Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release. 343 Maintenance and care STEP 3 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ Parking lights STEP 1 Release the lock and remove the cover. STEP 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. ■ Back-up light STEP 1 344 Open the trunk door and remove the trunk panel cover clips. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 2 STEP 3 Partly remove the trunk panel cover and turn bulb bases counterclockwise. Remove the light bulb. 4 ■ Rear turn signal lights Open the trunk door and remove the cover. STEP 2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise. 345 Maintenance and care STEP 1 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 3 Remove the light bulb. ■ Bulbs other than the above If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it. ● Headlight low beams (halogen bulbs) ● Headlight high and low beams (discharge bulbs) ● Front fog lights ● Front turn signal lights ● Front side marker lights ● Stop/tail lights ● Tail lights ● Rear side marker lights ● High mounted stoplight ● License plate lights 346 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance ■ When replacing the front left headlight and parking light bulbs Remove the securing bolt and move the washer fluid filler opening to allow easy access to the light bulbs. After replacing the bulbs, make sure to secure the washer fluid filler opening with the bolt. ■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. ● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. ● Water has built up inside the headlight. ■ Discharge headlights (if equipped) 4 347 Maintenance and care If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored. 4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance CAUTION ■ Replacing light bulbs ● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn- ing off the headlights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. ● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack. ● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens. ● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death. ■ Discharge headlights (if equipped) ● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light bulbs). ● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock. ■ To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked. 348 When trouble arises 5 5-1. Essential information................... 350 If the vehicle battery is discharged ............................ 397 If your vehicle needs to be towed ..................................... 350 If your vehicle overheats............................... 400 If you think something is wrong ...................................... 356 If the vehicle becomes stuck........................................ 402 Fuel pump shut off system ..................................... 357 Event data recorder ............. 358 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency.................... 360 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ................................ 360 If a warning message is displayed ................................ 369 If you have a flat tire.............. 382 If the engine will not start...... 391 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P........................ 392 If you lose your keys............... 393 If the electronic key does not operate properly .......... 394 349 5-1. Essential information If your vehicle needs to be towed If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws. If towing from the rear, the vehicle’s front wheels and axles must be in good condition. (P. 354) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck. Before towing The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing. ● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move. ● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound. Emergency towing If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s). This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition. Towing eyelets 350 5-1. Essential information ■ Emergency towing procedure STEP 1 Release the parking brake. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N. STEP 3 Put the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running). CAUTION ■ Caution while towing ● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. ● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult. NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (vehicles with an automatic transmission) 5 Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. When trouble arises ■ When towing a vehicle without using a towing dolly (vehicles with a manual transmission) The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must not be OFF. 351 5-1. Essential information Installing towing eyelets STEP 1 Remove the eyelet cover using a flat head screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration. STEP 2 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand. STEP 3 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench. ■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet P. 382 352 5-1. Essential information CAUTION ■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death. Towing with a sling-type truck NOTICE ■ To prevent body damage 5 Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. When trouble arises 353 5-1. Essential information Towing with a wheel lift-type truck From the front Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. Vehicles with a manual transmissions: We recommend to use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. When not using a towing dolly, release the parking brake and shift the shift lever to N. From the rear (2WD models) Switch to ACCESSORY mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked. From the rear (AWD models) Use a towing dolly under the front wheel. 354 5-1. Essential information NOTICE ■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground. ■ To prevent damaging the vehicle ● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight. ● When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear. Using a flat bed truck If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration. Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged. 355 When trouble arises If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45. 5 5-1. Essential information If you think something is wrong If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Visible symptoms ● Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) ● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear ● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal ■ Audible symptoms ● Changes in exhaust sound ● Excessive tire squeal when cornering ● Strange noises related to the suspension system ● Pinging or other noises related to the engine ■ Operational symptoms ● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough ● Appreciable loss of power ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking ● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road ● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor 356 5-1. Essential information Fuel pump shut off system To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine. Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated. Switch to ACCESSORY mode or OFF. 2 Restart the engine. STEP 1 STEP NOTICE ■ Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. 5 When trouble arises 357 5-1. Essential information Event data recorder Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event. In a crash or a near car crash event The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information: ● Engine speed ● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not ● Vehicle speed ● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed ● Position of the transmission shift lever ● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not ● Driver's seat position ● SRS airbag deployment data ● SRS airbag system diagnostic data ● Front passenger’s occupant classification The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers. 358 5-1. Essential information Disclosure of the data Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: ● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained ● Officially requested by the police or other authorities ● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit ● Ordered by a court law However, if necessary Lexus will: ● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance ● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary ● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes 5 When trouble arises 359 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous. The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)* (U.S.A.) • Low brake fluid • Malfunction in the brake booster system This light also comes on when the parking brake is not (Canada) released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally. *: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: P. 373 360 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Stop the vehicle immediately. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Warning light Warning light/Details Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning light Warning light/Details Malfunction indicator lamp (U.S.A.) Indicates a malfunction in: • The electronic engine control system; (Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or • The electronic automatic transmission control system. 5 When trouble arises SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The SRS airbag system; or • The seat belt pretensioner system. 361 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light Warning light/Details “ABS” warning light Indicates a malfunction in: • The ABS; (Canada) • The brake assist system. (U.S.A.) Electric power steering system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Warning light Warning light/Details Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1 Indicates that a door or a trunk is not fully closed. Correction procedure Check that all doors and the trunk are closed. Low fuel level warning light Remaining fuel Refuel the vehicle. (Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L, 2.4 Imp.gal.] or less) (On the instrument cluster) 362 Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt. Fasten the seat belt. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning light (On the center panel) Warning light/Details Correction procedure Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Fasten the seat belt. (warning buzzer)*2 Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt. Tire pressure warning light When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure Adjust the tire inflation pressure. When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Have the system checked by Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer. sure warning system Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction. P. 369 5 P. 373 2 * :Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders buzzer: The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her sear belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds. 363 When trouble arises *1:Open door warning buzzer: 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: ● Is the fuel empty? If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. ● Is the fuel tank cap loose? If it is, tighten it securely. The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer ● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat. ● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly. ■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pressing the satellite switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light. ■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes). ■ When a tires is replaced with a spare tire The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes. 364 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used ● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis- tered in the tire pressure warning computer ● If a different set of tires has been selected using the satellite switch. ● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) ● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby ● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle ● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings ● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.) ● If tire chains are used ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 5 When trouble arises 365 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. ● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres- sure immediately. ● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust- ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer. ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. ■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately. 366 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and loading information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and loading information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly. 367 5 When trouble arises Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Precaution when installing a different tire When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. 368 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If a warning message is displayed If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions: Master warning light The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display. Multi-information display If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer. Stop the vehicle immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. (Flashing) Details Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure. The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low. 369 When trouble arises Warning message 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system. (If equipped) Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. (P. 307) (Flashing and then The tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute. continuously on) Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system. (Flashing) 370 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system. (If equipped) Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction. The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on the display. (If equipped) 5 Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control system. When trouble arises (Flashing) (If equipped) 371 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warning may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. Warning message Details Indicates a malfunction in the TRAC, VSC or hillstart assist control systems. 372 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off. Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed. The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. flashes and a Make sure that all of the doors are closed. buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). 5 When trouble arises Indicates that the hood is not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood. cate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). 373 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk. cate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). (Flashing) Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and the driver’s door opened). Close the moon roof. Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged. flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]). Release the parking brake. Indicates that the washer Add washer fluid. fluid level is low. 374 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Indicates that engine oil level is low. Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary. Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. (U.S.A. only) Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) Check the engine oil, and after the engine oil is change if necessary. changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset.) Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) Check and change the engine oil. after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset). When trouble arises (U.S.A. only) 5 375 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message Details Correction procedure Check the tire inflation Indicates low tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the pressure. appropriate level. (Flashing) Indicates that the precollision system is not currently functional. Clean the grille and the sensor. This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down. Indicates that intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice. Clean the sensor. Indicates that the radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice. Clean the sensor. (If equipped) (If equipped) (Flashing) (If equipped) 376 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Warning message (Flashing and then continuously on) (Flashing) Details Correction procedure Indicates that the radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance. • Switch the driving mode to either the normal or power mode. • If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode. Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode). Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes. (If equipped) (Flashing) (If equipped) 5 ■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only) Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 295) In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance closes. ● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle ● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed ● Immediately after cruise control speed is set ● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed 377 When trouble arises ■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Follow the correction procedures. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off. Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once Warning message (Comes on for 10 seconds.) (Flashing) Once 3 times (Flashing) 378 Details Correction procedure Indicates that an attempt was made to start the engine without the electronic key being present, or the electronic key was not functioning normally. Start the engine with the electronic key present.* Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the Confirm the loca“ENGINE START tion of the elecSTOP” switch in tronic key. any mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once 3 times Warning message (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) (Flashing) Once Continuous (Flashing) Once Correction procedure Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed with the shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in any mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF or confirm the location of the electronic key. Indicates that the driver’s door has been opened or closed (with the shift lever out of in • Shift the shift lever to P. P, the “ENGINE • Confirm the START STOP” location of the switch in any electronic key. mode other than OFF and the electronic key outside of the detection area). Indicates that the key battery is low. Replace the battery. (P. 325) (Flashing) 379 5 When trouble arises (Displayed alternately) (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) Details 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once Warning message (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) Once (Vehicles with a manual transmission) Once (Flashing) 380 Details Correction procedure Indicates that a door has been opened or closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched twice to ACCESSORY mode from OFF. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while applying the brakes. Indicates that a door has been opened or closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been switched twice to ACCESSORY mode from OFF. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while depressing the clutch pedal. Indicates that the steering lock has not released within 3 seconds of pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again while turning the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer Once Correction procedure Warning message Details (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly. P. 395 Indicates that the electronic key does not operate properly. P. 395 (Vehicles with an automatic transmission) Once (Vehicles with a manual transmission) When trouble arises 5 (Vehicles with a manual transmission) *: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 26) 381 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you have a flat tire Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided. ■ Before jacking up the vehicle ● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. ● Set the parking brake. ● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic) or R (manual). ● Stop the engine. ● Turn on the emergency flashers. ■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools Jack handle Jack Tool bag (including towing eyelet) 382 Spare tire Tighten Loosen 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Taking out the spare tire STEP 1 Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor. STEP 2 Secure the panel using the hook provided. STEP 3 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire. 5 When trouble arises 383 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Replacing a flat tire STEP 1 Chock the tires. Flat tire Left-hand side Front Righthand side Left-hand side Rear Righthand side STEP 2 STEP 3 384 Wheel chock positions Behind the rear righthand side tire Behind the rear lefthand side tire In front of the front righthand side tire In front of the front lefthand side tire Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn). Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground. STEP 5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire. When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface. Installing the spare tire STEP 1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface. 385 When trouble arises If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle. 5 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 2 Tapered portion Disc wheel sheet STEP 3 STEP 4 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each nut by hand to approximately the same amount. Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet. Lower the vehicle. Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration. Tightening torque: 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) STEP 5 386 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency ■ The compact spare tire ● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency. ● Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 415) ■ When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on. ■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires. STEP 1 Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire. STEP 2 Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehi- cle. STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires. ■ After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 308) 5 When trouble arises 387 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Using the tire jack Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack. ● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. ● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. ● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. ● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack. ● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it. ● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. ● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. ● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured. ■ Replacing a flat tire Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. ● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. ● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. 388 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ When using the compact spare tire ● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle. ● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously. ● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible. ● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering. ■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury. ■ When the compact spare tire attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly: ● ABS & brake assist ● VSC ● TRAC 5 ● Navigation system (if equipped) ● AWD system 389 When trouble arises Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components: 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire. Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair. ■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle. The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. ■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. ■ When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly. ■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires. 390 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the engine will not start If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures are being followed (P. 117), consider each of the following points. ■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank. Refuel the vehicle. ● The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (P. 117) ● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 72) ■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● The battery may be discharged. (P. 397) 5 ● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded. When trouble arises ■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem. ● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. ● The battery may be discharged. (P. 397) ● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown. 391 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Set the parking brake. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode. Depress the brake pedal. Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Press the shift lock override button. The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed. 392 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If you lose your keys New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. 5 When trouble arises 393 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the electronic key does not operate properly If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 26) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below. Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions Doors Remove the cover on the driver’s door handle using the mechanical key in order to perform the following operations. Locks all doors Closes the windows/moon roof (turn and hold) Unlocks the door Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors. Opens the windows/moon roof (turn and hold) Return the cover to the original position after use. 394 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Trunk Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine Automatic transmission STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes. Touch the Lexus emblem side of STEP 2 the electronic key to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. STEP 3 To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 117) To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed. 395 5 When trouble arises An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Manual transmission STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to N and depress the clutch pedal. STEP 2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to the “ENGINE START STOP” switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch. To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the clutch pedal and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 117) To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the clutch pedal depressed. In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer. STEP 3 ■ Stopping the engine For vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. For vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N position and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. ■ Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 325) 396 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle battery is discharged The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged. You can call your Lexus dealer, or qualified repair shop. If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below. STEP 1 Remove the engine compartment covers. (P. 294) STEP 2 Connecting the jumper cables. 397 5 When trouble arises If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.) Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration. STEP 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle’s engine. STEP 6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected. Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. STEP 5 ■ Avoiding a discharged battery ● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off. ● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc. ■ When the battery is removed or discharged The power windows must be initialized. (P. 64) CAUTION ■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery. ● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal. ● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi- nals. ● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery. 398 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency CAUTION ■ Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery. ● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. ● Do not lean over the battery ● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi- ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. ● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. ● Do not allow children near the battery. NOTICE ■ To prevent damaging the vehicle 5 ■ When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them. 399 When trouble arises Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If your vehicle overheats If your engine overheats: STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 400 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system. Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood. If you see steam: Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood. If you do not see steam: Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood. Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 294) Check to see if the cooling fan is operating. If the fan is operating: Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine. If the fan is not operating: Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus dealer. After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks. 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency STEP 6 Add engine coolant if required. Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 411) Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible. ■ Overheating If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating. ● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced. ● Steam is coming from under the hood. 5 CAUTION ● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running. ● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure. NOTICE ■ When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine. 401 When trouble arises ■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency If the vehicle becomes stuck Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the selector lever in P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N (vehicles with a manual transmission). Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire. Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires. Restart the engine. Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic) or 1 or R position (manual) and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle. Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. ( P. 172) CAUTION ■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution. ■ When shifting the shift lever With automatic transmission vehicles, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury. 402 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency NOTICE ■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components ● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine. ● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed. 5 When trouble arises 403 5-2. Steps to take in an emergency 404 Vehicle specifications 6 6-1. Specifications................. 406 Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)......................... 406 Fuel information...................... 421 Tire information...................... 424 6-2. Customization................ 436 Customizable features ........ 436 6-3. Initialization .................... 441 Items to initialize ..................... 441 405 6-1. Specifications Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) Dimensions and weight Overall length 180.1 in. (4575 mm) Overall width 70.9 in. (1800 mm) Overall height *1 2WD models 56.1 in. (1425 mm) AWD models 56.7 in. (1440 mm) Wheelbase Tread Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage) 107.4 in. (2730 mm) Front 60.4 in. (1535 mm) Rear 60.0 in. (1525 mm)*2 60.4 in. (1535 mm)*3 825 lb. (375 kg) *1: Unladen vehicle *2: Vehicle with 255/40R18 tires *3: Vehicle with tires other than the above 406 6-1. Specifications Vehicle identification ■ Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment. This number is also on the Certification Label. 6 Vehicle specifications 407 6-1. Specifications ■ Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 408 6-1. Specifications Engine IS250 IS350 Model 4GR-FSE 2GR-FSE Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 3.27 3.03 in. (83.0 77.0 mm) 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm) Displacement 152.5 cu.in. (2500 cm3) 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment Fuel Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher Fuel tank capacity 17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.) 6 Vehicle specifications 409 6-1. Specifications Lubrication system IS250 IS350 Oil capacity (drain and refill) with filter 2WD models AWD models 6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.) 6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.) 6.8 qt. (6.4 L, 5.7 lmp.qt.) without filter 2WD models AWD models 6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.) 6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.) 6.3 qt. (6.0 L, 5.3 lmp.qt.) Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown below. Recommended oil viscosity Outside temperature *:5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency. Oil viscosity ● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. ● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition. 410 6-1. Specifications Cooling system Capacity 9.6 qt. (9.1 L, 8.0 lmp.qt.) Coolant type Use either of the following. • “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” • Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone. Ignition system Spark plug Make Gap DENSO FK20HBR11 0.043 in. (1.1 mm) NOTICE ■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine. 6 Vehicle specifications 411 6-1. Specifications Electrical system Battery Open voltage* at 68F (20C): 12.6 12.8 V Fully charged 12.2 12.4 V Half charged 11.8 12.0 V Discharged (*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and all the lights are turned off) Charging rates 5 A max. Differential Oil capacity Front 0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.61 lmp.qt.) Rear IS350: 1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.) IS250 (2WD models): 1.20 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 lmp.qt.) IS250 (AWD models): 1.10 qt. (1.05 L, 0.92 lmp.qt.) IS250 (AWD) Hypoid gear oil API GL-5 Above 0F (-18C): SAE90 Below 0F (-18C): SAE80W or SAE80W-90 Others “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5” or equivalent Oil type and viscosity* *: “Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 412 6-1. Specifications Automatic Transmission IS350 IS250 (2WD) IS250 (AWD) Fluid capacity* 7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 lmp.qt.) 7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 lmp.qt.) 9.4 qt. (8.9 L, 7.8 lmp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS *: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. Manual Transmission Gear oil capacity 1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp.qt.) Gear oil type API GL-5 Recommended gear oil viscosity SAE75W-90 NOTICE 6 Clutch Clutch free play 0.2 0.6 in. (5 15 mm) Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 413 Vehicle specifications Using manual transmission gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil API GL-5” may cause occurrence of gear noise or other deterioration. 6-1. Specifications Brakes Pedal clearance *1 IS 350 IS 250 Manual transmission Automatic transmission 4.13 in. (105 mm) Min. 4.09 in. (104 mm) Min. 4.3 in. (108 mm) Min. Pedal free play 0.04 0.08 in. (1.0 2.0 mm) Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm) Parking brake pedal travel *2 / lever travel *3 Pedal type Lever type 7 9 clicks 4 6 clicks Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running. *2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N, 30.6 kgf). *3: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf). 414 6-1. Specifications Steering Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm) Tires and wheels Type A Tire size 205/55R16 89W, T125/70D17 98M (spare) Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Front and rear tire inflation presSpare: sure 2 (Recommended cold tire inflation 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph pressure) (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 5.8 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/ cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 16 7JJ, 17 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 6 Vehicle specifications 415 6-1. Specifications Type B Tire size 225/45R17 90W, 245/45R17 95W, T125/ 70D17 98M (spare) Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Front and rear tire inflation presSpare: sure 2 (Recommended cold tire inflation 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph pressure) (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 4.5 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/ cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 17 8JJ, 17 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 416 6-1. Specifications Type C Tire size 225/45R17 91V, 225/45R17 91V, T125/ 70D17 98M Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Front and rear tire inflation presSpare: sure 2 (Recommended cold tire inflation 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph pressure) (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/ cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 17 8JJ, 17 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 6 Vehicle specifications 417 6-1. Specifications Type D Tire size Front tires: 225/45R17 91V Rear tires: 245/45R17 95V Spare tire: T125/70R17 98M Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Front and rear tire inflation presSpare: sure 2 (Recommended cold tire inflation 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph pressure) (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 10 psi (70 kPa, 0.7 kgf/ cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 17 8JJ, 17 4T (spare) Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 418 6-1. Specifications Type E Tire size Front tires: 225/40R18 88Y Rear tires: 255/40R18 95Y Spare tire: T145/70R17 106M Driving under normal conditions Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Rear: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.6 kgf/cm2 or bar)* Front and rear tire inflation presSpare: sure 2 (Recommended cold tire inflation 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm or bar) *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph pressure) (160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 7.2 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/ cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall. Wheel size Front wheels: 18 8J Rear wheels: 18 8 1/2J Spare wheel: 17 4T Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) 6 Vehicle specifications 419 6-1. Specifications Light bulbs Exterior Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type Headlights High beam Low/high* beam (discharge bulbs) Low beam* (halogen bulbs) 9005 D4S H11 60 35 55 D A B Front turn signal lights 21 C Parking lights 168 5 E Front fog lights 9006 55 F 5 G 7440 21 E Back-up lights 921 16 E Outer foot lights 5 E Vanity lights 8 E Interior lights Front Rear 10 3.0 E G Overhead courtesy lights Front Rear 3.8 3.0 E G Door courtesy lights 3.8 E Trunk light Rear turn signal lights Interior *: If equipped A: D4S discharge bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs C: Wedge base bulbs (amber) D: HB3 halogen bulbs E: Wedge base bulbs (clear) F: HB4 halogen bulbs G: Double end bulbs 420 6-1. Specifications Fuel information Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada. ■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps. ■ If premium gasoline is not available If 91 rating gasoline cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Rating 91). ■ If your engine knocks ● Consult your Lexus dealer. ● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern. ■ Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer. 6 Vehicle specifications 421 6-1. Specifications ■ Gasoline quality standards ● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide. ● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted. ● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance. ■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives ● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits. ● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems. ■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. ■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline ● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con- tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. ● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. ● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. ■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. 422 6-1. Specifications NOTICE ■ Notice on gasoline quality ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. ● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. ● IS250: Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline. ● IS350: Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline. ■ Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel. ■ When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint. 6 Vehicle specifications 423 6-1. Specifications Tire information Typical tire symbols Standard tire Compact spare tire Tire size DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Location of treadwear indicators Tire ply composition and materials (P. 426) (P. 426) (P. 306) Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire. 424 6-1. Specifications Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire. TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 311) (P. 415) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows. Summer tire or all season tire (P. 312) An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 387) A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. 6 Vehicle specifications 425 6-1. Specifications Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN) DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year *: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Tire size ■ Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size. Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) 426 6-1. Specifications ■ Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter Tire section names Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer 6 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. 427 Vehicle specifications This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.A. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. 6-1. Specifications ■ DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. ■ Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. 428 6-1. Specifications ■ Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term Accessory weight Meaning The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not) Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine 429 Vehicle specifications Cold tire inflation pressure 6 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Maximum inflation pressure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows Production options weight The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below Recommended inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer. Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat Rim size designation Rim diameter and width Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code 430 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Rim width Meaning Nominal distance between rim flanges The load on an individual tire that is determined by Vehicle maximum load on distributing to each axle its share of the maximum the tire loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two Vehicle normal load on the tire The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing it by two Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire 6 Vehicle specifications 431 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material CT A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass 432 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Intended outboard sidewall (a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum permissible inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10000 lb. or less. Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords 6 Vehicle specifications 433 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies Pneumatic tire A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall Snow tire A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall Test rim 434 ) The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire 6-1. Specifications Tire related term Meaning Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing *:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat 11 through 15 16 through 20 435 6 Vehicle specifications Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants 6-2. Customization Customizable features Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details. Item Smart access system with push-button start (P. 22) Wireless remote control (P. 34) 436 Function Default setting Customized setting Smart access system with push-button start On Off Operation signal (Emergency flashers) On Off Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off Wireless remote control On Off Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step On Off Unlocking operation Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked 6-2. Customization Item Function Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked Wireless remote control (P. 34) Default setting Customized setting 30 seconds 60 seconds 120 seconds Operation signal (Emergency flashers) On Off Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off Trunk unlocking function On Off Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold Panic function On Push twice One short push Off 6 Vehicle specifications 437 6-2. Customization Item Default setting Customized setting Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps All doors unlocked in one step Speed-detecting automatic door lock function (Manual transmissions) On Off Speed-detecting automatic door lock function (Automatic transmissions) Off On Opening driver's door unlocks all doors (Manual transmissions) On Off Opening driver's door unlocks all doors (Automatic transmissions) Off On Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors. On Off Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors. On Off Function Unlocking using a key Door lock (P. 37) 438 6-2. Customization Item Power windows (P. 64) Moon roof (P. 66) Default setting Customized setting Linked door lock operation On Off Linked door key operation Open and close Wireless remote control linked operation On Off Linked door lock operation On Off Linked door key operation Open and close Open only Close only Open only Close only Linked operation of components when door key is used Slide only Tilt only Wireless remote control linked operation On Off Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used Slide only Tilt only Level 3 Level 1 to 5 Light sensor sensitivity Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed 6 0 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds 439 Vehicle specifications Automatic light control system (P. 143) Function 6-2. Customization Item Windshield wipers and washer (P. 147) Intuitive parking assist (P. 164) Illumination (P. 231) Function Default setting Customized setting Switching operation when the vehicle is stationary On Off Drip prevention function On Off Time elapsed before the drip prevention function operates Variable depending on the vehicle speed 3 seconds Back sensor operation display and buzzer On Off Level 3 Level 1 to 5 Distance which a sensor detects 150 cm (4.9 ft.) 60 cm (2.0 ft.) Time elapsed before lights turn off 15 seconds Buzzer volume Canada 440 30 seconds Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off Operation after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch turned OFF On Off Front foot well lighting On Off Shift lever lighting On Off Outer foot light On Off Multi-information display (P. 139) Country 7.5 seconds Available language English and French 6-3. Initialization Items to initialize The following item must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle. Item When to initialize Reference Power window After reconnecting or changing the battery P. 64 Engine oil maintenance data After changing engine oil P. 295 Tire pressure warning system • When rotating the tires differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures. • When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed. • When changing the tire size. P. 307 6 Vehicle specifications 441 6-3. Initialization 442 For owners 7 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners..................... 444 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ............................. 445 443 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 444 Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual. See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English. Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité ● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec votre cou ou glisser de votre épaule. ● Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches. ● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège. ● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité. Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs) 445 7 For owners Si la sangle diagonale est proche du cou de la personne, faites coulisser le guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant. Entretien et soin ■ Ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées. ATTENTION ■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident. 446 Index Abbreviation list .................... 448 Alphabetical index................. 450 What to do if... ....................... 462 For details of equipment related to the navigation system, such as the audio system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”. 447 Abbreviation list Abbreviation/Acronym list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING ABS Anti-Lock Brake System AFS Adaptive Front-lighting System AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift ALR Automatic Locking Retractor CAL Calibration CRS Child Restraint System DISP Display ECT Electronic Controlled Transmission ECU Electronic Control Unit EDR Event data recorder ELR Emergency Locking Retractor EPS Electric Power Steering ETCS Electronic Throttle Control System GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating I/M Emission inspection and maintenance INT Intermittent MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl M+S Mud and Snow MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether OBD On Board Diagnostics PCS Pre-Collision System SRS Supplemental Restraint System TIN Tire Identification Number TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System TRAC Traction Control 448 Abbreviation list ABBREVIATIONS MEANING VDIM Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management VIN Vehicle Identification Number VSC Vehicle Stability Control 449 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index A A/C ............................................................. 192 ABS.............................................................. 170 AFS .............................................................. 144 Adaptive front lighting system ......... 144 Air conditioning filter ..........................322 Air conditioning system Air conditioning filter ....................... 322 Automatic air conditioning system....................................................192 Airbags Airbag operating conditions.............81 Airbag precautions for your child..........................................................85 Airbag warning light ..........................361 Curtain shield airbag operating conditions.............................................. 82 Curtain shield airbag precautions ..........................................85 Front passenger occupant classification system.........................90 General airbag precautions ...........85 Locations of airbags............................ 79 Modification and disposal of airbags....................................................89 Proper driving posture ............. 77, 85 Side airbag operating conditions.............................................. 82 Side airbag precautions ....................85 SRS airbags ............................................. 79 450 Alarm.............................................................74 Antenna....................................................208 Anti-lock brake system........................170 Armrest ....................................................255 Ashtrays....................................................248 Audio input..............................................228 Audio system Antenna..................................................208 Audio input........................................... 228 AUX adapter ...................................... 228 CD player/changer............................. 211 MP3/WMA disc..................................217 Optimal use ..........................................225 Portable music player..................... 228 Radio ....................................................... 204 Steering wheel audio switch.........229 Automatic air conditioning system ......................................................192 Automatic headlight leveling system ......................................................145 Automatic light control system.........143 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission ....................122 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P....................................392 S mode ..................................................... 124 AUX adapter .........................................228 Alphabetical index B Back-up lights Wattage ................................................. 420 Battery Checking............................................... 302 If the vehicle has discharged battery.................................................. 397 Preparing and checking before winter......................................183 Bottle holders .......................................... 241 Brake Fluid............................................................301 Parking brake........................................129 Brake assist...............................................170 C Care Exterior ....................................................274 Interior......................................................277 Seat belts ............................................... 278 Cargo capacity ....................................... 179 Cargo hooks ............................................ 261 CD changer ...............................................211 CD player....................................................211 Chains.........................................................183 Child restraint system Booster seats, definition.................... 95 Booster seats, installation................. 99 Convertible seats, definition ........... 95 Convertible seats, installation ........ 99 Front passenger occupant classification system.........................90 Infant seats, definition..........................95 Infant seats, installation .......................99 Installing CRS with lower anchorages......................................... 102 Installing CRS with seat belts..........99 Installing CRS with top straps.......103 Child safety Airbag precautions............................. 85 Battery precautions .............304, 399 Child restraint system.........................95 Child-protectors ...................................38 How your child should wear the seat belt ..........................................55 Installing child restraints.....................98 Moon roof precautions......................68 Power window lock switch..............64 Power window precautions ............65 Removed electronic key battery precautions........................................326 Seat belt comfort guide .....................53 Seat belt extender precautions......57 Seat belt precautions ..........................56 Seat heater precautions......252, 254 Trunk precautions.................................43 Child-protectors......................................38 Cigarette lighter....................................249 451 Alphabetical index Cleaning Exterior ....................................................274 Interior......................................................277 Seat belts................................................ 278 Clock .........................................................244 Coat hooks..............................................259 Compass ..................................................269 Condenser ...............................................301 Console box ........................................... 237 Cooling system Engine overheating ......................... 400 Cornering assist sensors .................... 164 Cruise control Cruise control .......................................152 Dynamic radar cruise control ...... 155 Cup holder ..............................................239 Curtain shield airbags............................ 79 Customizable features .......................436 452 D Daytime running light system............144 Defogger Rear window .......................................200 Side mirror............................................200 Dimension ...............................................406 Dinghy towing...............................188, 189 Display Dynamic radar cruise control.......155 Satellite switch mode....................... 245 Trip information....................................140 Warning message ............................ 369 Do-it-yourself maintenance.............286 Door courtesy lights Door courtesy lights .......................... 231 Wattage ................................................. 420 Door pockets ...........................................241 Doors Door glasses............................................64 Door lock .................................22, 34, 37 Side mirrors............................................... 61 Driver's seat belt reminder light..... 362 Driving Correct posture..................................... 77 Procedures.............................................108 Driving position memory...................... 46 Alphabetical index E Electric power steering .......................170 Electronic key If the electronic key does not operate properly............................ 394 Emergency, in case of If the engine will not start.................391 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P................................... 392 If the vehicle has discharged battery.................................................. 397 If the warning buzzer sounds......360 If the warning light turns on..........360 If the warning message is displayed............................................369 If you have a flat tire ........................ 382 If you lose your keys ........................ 393 If you think something is wrong...................................................356 If the electronic key does not operate properly............................ 394 If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 402 If your vehicle needs to be towed...................................................350 If your vehicle overheats................400 Engine Compartment......................................292 Engine switch.......................................... 117 Hood....................................................... 289 How to start the engine ..................... 117 Identification number .......................407 If the engine will not start................. 391 Ignition switch......................................... 117 Overheating ........................................400 Engine compartment cover .............294 Engine coolant Capacity .................................................... 411 Checking ...............................................299 Preparing and checking before winter .....................................183 Engine coolant temperature gauge.......................................................130 Engine immobilizer system.................. 72 Engine oil Capacity .................................................. 410 Checking ...............................................295 Preparing and checking before winter .....................................183 Engine oil maintenance data............298 EPS .............................................................. 170 Event data recorder ........................... 358 453 Alphabetical index F 454 First-aid kit storage belt ...................... 261 Floor mat ..................................................260 Fluid Brake......................................................... 301 Washer...................................................305 Fog lights Switch ........................................................146 Wattage..................................................420 Foot well lighting .................................... 231 Front fog lights Switch ........................................................146 Wattage..................................................420 Front passenger occupant classification system ............................90 Front passenger's seat belt reminder light......................................362 Front seats Adjustment............................................... 44 Driving position memory.................. 46 Seat position memory ........................ 49 Front turn signal lights Switch........................................................128 Wattage ................................................. 420 Fuel Capacity ................................................409 Fuel gauge..............................................130 Fuel pump shut off system.............357 Gas station information ................. 464 Information ............................................. 421 Refueling....................................................69 Fuel door..................................................... 69 Fuel filler door........................................... 69 Fuel pump shut off system................. 357 Fuses .......................................................... 327 G Garage door opener.......................... 264 Gas station information ..................... 464 Gauges...................................................... 130 Glove box................................................ 236 Glove box light...................................... 237 Alphabetical index H Head restraints Adjusting ................................................... 51 Headlight aim ..........................................341 Headlight cleaner ................................... 151 Headlights Discharge headlights precautions .......................................348 Replacing light bulbs ....................... 342 Switch........................................................143 Wattage ................................................. 420 Heaters Seat heaters................................251, 253 Side mirror............................................200 Hill-start assist control .........................170 Hood ......................................................... 289 Hooks Cargo........................................................261 Coat ......................................................... 259 Shopping bag........................................261 I I/M test......................................................285 Identification Engine......................................................407 Vehicle ....................................................407 Ignition switch............................................ 117 Illuminated entry system ....................233 Indicator lights......................................... 136 Initialization Items to initialize ...................................441 Inside rear view mirror ..........................60 Interior lights Interior lights...........................................231 Switch.......................................................234 Wattage..................................................420 J Jack Positioning a floor jack................... 290 Replacing the wheel.........................382 Jack handle..............................................382 455 Alphabetical index K Keyless entry..............................................34 Keys Electronic key......................................... 20 Engine switch...........................................117 If you lose your keys.........................393 If the electronic key does not operate properly ............................394 Key number............................................. 20 Keyless entry........................................... 34 Keys............................................................. 20 Mechanical key...................................... 20 Wireless remote control key.......... 34 L 456 Light bulbs Replacing............................................... 342 Wattage..................................................420 Lights Door courtesy lights...........................231 Fog light switch.....................................146 Headlights switch ................................143 Interior light switch............................ 234 Outer foot lights...................................231 Overhead courtesy light..................231 Personal light switch ........................ 234 Replacing light bulbs........................ 342 Scuff lighting...........................................231 Shift lever lighting ................................231 Turn signal lever...................................128 Vanity lights .......................................... 243 Wattage..................................................420 Load capacity .......................................... 182 M Maintenance Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 286 General maintenance..................... 282 Maintenance data .............................406 Maintenance requirements..........280 Manual transmission .............................126 Meter Instrument panel light control.........131 Meters.......................................................130 Micro dust and pollen filter ................196 Mirrors Inside rear view mirror ...................... 60 Side mirror heater.............................200 Side mirrors............................................... 61 Vanity mirrors......................................243 Moon roof................................................... 66 MP3 disc....................................................217 Multi-information display....................139 O Odometer ................................................ 130 Oil Engine oil............................................... 295 Opener Fuel filler door .........................................69 Hood ....................................................... 289 Trunk..............................................................41 Outer foot lights Outer foot lights................................... 231 Wattage ................................................. 420 Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding........................... 61 Mirror position memory....................46 Outside temperature display ........... 140 Overhead console...............................238 Alphabetical index Overhead courtesy lights Overhead courtesy lights ............... 231 Wattage ................................................. 420 Overheating, Engine .......................... 400 P Parking assist sensors ..........................164 Parking brake ..........................................129 Parking lights Replacing light bulbs ....................... 342 Switch........................................................143 Wattage ................................................. 420 PCS.............................................................. 176 Personal lights Switch...................................................... 234 Power outlet........................................... 250 Power windows.........................................64 Pre-collision system.............................. 176 R Radar cruise control .............................155 Radiator......................................................301 Radio ......................................................... 204 RDS............................................................ 205 Rear sunshade....................................... 256 Rear turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs ....................... 342 Wattage ................................................. 420 Rear view mirror Compass............................................... 269 Rear window defogger...................... 200 Replacing Electronic key battery ..................... 325 Fuses.........................................................327 Light bulbs ............................................ 342 Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ..........................................444 S Scuff lighting ............................................ 231 Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt........................53 Automatic locking retractor............54 Child restraint system installation..............................................98 Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts .....................................278 Emergency locking retractor..........54 How to wear your seat belt .............52 How your child should wear the seat belt ..........................................55 Pregnant women, proper seat belt use .........................54 Reminder light .....................................362 Seat belt extenders ..............................55 Seat belt pretensioners ......................53 Seat heaters ..................................251, 253 Seat position memory............................49 Seat ventilators ......................................253 Seating capacity..................................... 182 Seats Adjustment...............................................44 Adjustment precautions ....................45 Child seats/child restraint system installation..............................98 Cleaning................................................. 277 Driver’s seat position memory.......46 Front passenger seat position memory..................................................49 Head restraint...........................................51 Properly sitting in the seat .................77 Seat heaters ............................... 251, 253 Ventilated seats ..................................253 Service reminder indicators ............. 136 457 Alphabetical index Shift lever Automatic transmission.................... 122 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................392 Manual transmission ..........................126 Shift lever lighting .................................. 231 Shift lock system....................................392 Shopping bag hooks............................. 261 Side airbags................................................ 79 Side marker lights Switch ........................................................143 Side mirror Adjusting and folding ...........................61 Mirror position memory ................... 46 Smart access system with push-button start Entry function...........................................22 Starting the engine................................117 Spare tire Inflation pressure..................................316 Spare tire................................................382 Spark plug...................................................411 Specifications .........................................406 Speech command switch* Speedometer Speed indicator ................................... 130 Speedometer........................................ 130 458 Steering wheel Audio switches....................................229 Manual adjustment.............................. 58 Power adjustment................................ 59 Steering wheel position memory ..................................................46 Storage feature ..................................... 236 Stuck If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 402 Sun visors................................................. 242 Sunshade Rear.......................................................... 256 Roof..............................................................67 Switch ECT switch............................................. 123 Engine switch .......................................... 117 ETCS switch.......................................... 126 Fog light switch ....................................146 Ignition switch ......................................... 117 Light switches........................................ 143 Power door lock switch.....................37 Power window switch ........................64 Satellite switches................................ 245 Transmission shift switches ............ 124 Window lock switch............................64 Wipers and washer switch............. 147 Alphabetical index T Tachometer Tacho indicator ....................................130 Tachometer............................................130 Tail lights Switch........................................................143 Talk switch* Telephone switch* Theft deterrent system Alarm...........................................................74 Engine immobilizer system ..............72 Theft prevention labels ..........................76 Tire inflation pressure...........................316 Tire information Glossary ................................................ 429 Size ........................................................... 426 Tire identification number ............. 426 Uniform tire quality grading..........427 Tires Chains.......................................................183 Checking...............................................306 If you have a flat tire.......................... 382 Inflation pressure .................................316 Inflation pressure sensor................308 Information.............................................424 Replacing............................................... 382 Rotating tires........................................306 Size .............................................................415 Snow tires................................................183 Tools .......................................................... 382 Total load capacity.................................182 Towing Dinghy towing ...........................188, 189 Emergency towing........................... 350 Trailer towing ........................................ 187 TRAC.......................................................... 170 Traction control...................................... 170 Transmission shift switches................ 124 Trip meter .................................................130 Trunk Extending a space............................ 258 Opener ........................................................41 Trunk light Trunk light................................................. 42 Wattage..................................................420 Turn signal lights Replacing light bulbs........................342 Switch........................................................ 128 Wattage..................................................420 *: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual” 459 Alphabetical index V Vanity lights Vanity lights .......................................... 243 Wattage..................................................420 Vanity mirrors ........................................243 VDIM.......................................................... 170 Vehicle dynamics integrated management ........................................ 170 Vehicle identification number .........407 Vehicle stability control....................... 170 Ventilators ...............................................253 VSC............................................................. 170 W Warning buzzers Brake system .......................................360 Open door ..........................................362 Seat belt reminder.............................362 Warning lights Anti-lock brake system.....................361 Brake assist system.............................361 Brake system .......................................360 Charging system .................................361 Electric power steering warning light .......................................361 Low fuel level.......................................362 Malfunction indicator lamp.............361 Master warning light ........................362 Open door ...........................................362 Pre-collision system ...........................361 Pretensioners.........................................361 Seat belt reminder light ..................362 SRS airbags ............................................361 Tire pressure warning light........................................................362 460 Warning messages AWD system....................................... 370 Dynamic radar cruise control....................... 370, 373 Engine oil level.....................................373 Engine oil maintenance...................373 Engine oil pressure........................... 369 Hill-start assist control .....................372 Hood ........................................................373 Intuitive parking assist ......... 370, 373 Moon roof..............................................373 Open door............................................373 Parking brake.......................................373 Pre-collision system............. 370, 373 Smart access system with push-button start ........................... 378 Steering lock........................................ 370 Tire pressure warning system................... 370, 373 Traction control...................................372 Trunk.........................................................373 Vehicle stability control...................372 Washer fluid .........................................373 Washer Checking...............................................305 Preparing and checking before winter......................................183 Switch........................................................ 147 Washing and waxing............................274 Weight Cargo capacity .................................... 179 Load limits...............................................182 Weight....................................................406 Alphabetical index Wheels ..................................................... 320 Window glasses .......................................64 Window lock switch................................64 Windows Power windows .....................................64 Rear window defogger ..................200 Washer..................................................... 147 Windshield wipers................................. 147 Wireless remote control key Replacing the battery ...................... 325 WMA disc................................................. 217 461 What to do if... What to do if... A tire punctures P. 382 If you have a flat tire The engine does not start If the engine will not start P. 72 Engine immobilizer system P. 394 If the vehicle battery is discharged The shift lever cannot be moved out P. 392 P. 391 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone P. 400 If your vehicle overheats Steam can be seen coming from under the hood The key is lost P. 393 If you lose your keys The battery runs out P. 397 If the vehicle battery is discharged The doors cannot be locked P. 37 Doors The horn begins to sound P. 74 Alarm The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand 462 P. 402 If the vehicle becomes stuck What to do if... The warning light or indicator light comes on P. 360 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ■Warning lights Brake system warning light or Malfunction indicator lamp or P. 360 P. 361 Driver’s seat belt reminder light P. 362 “ABS” warning light or P. 361 Low fuel level warning light P. 362 SRS warning light P. 361 Open door warning light Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light P. 362 Master warning light P. 362 Electric power steering warning light P. 361 P. 362 Pre-collision system warning light P. 361 Charging system warning light P. 361 Low tire pressure warning light P. 362 The warning message is displayed P. 369 If the warning message is displayed 463 GAS STATION INFORMATION Auxiliary catch lever P. 289 Trunk opener P. 41 Hood lock release lever P. 289 Fuel tank capacity Fuel type Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill) Engine oil type 464 Fuel filler door opener P. 69 17.2 gal. (65 L, 14.3 lmp.gal.) Unleaded gasoline only Fuel filler door P. 69 Tire inflation pressure P. 415 P. 70, 409 P. 415 qt. (L, Imp.qt.) IS250 IS250 (2WD models) (AWD models) IS350 With filter 6.6 (6.3, 5.5) 6.8 (6.4, 5.7) 6.6 (6.3, 5.5) Without filter 6.2 (5.9, 5.2) 6.3 (6.0, 5.3) 6.2 (5.9, 5.2) Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 410 Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021